Yamaha YPT-330 de handleiding

Categorie
MIDI-toetsenborden
Type
de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

EN
Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard!
We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the
advanced and convenient functions of the instrument.
We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 4–5.
Owners Manual
DIGITAL KEYBOARD
DIGITAL KEYBOARD
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
2
LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON
PORTABLE KEYBOARDS
(NP, NPV, PSRE, YPG AND YPT SERIES)
Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free
performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every
Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the
Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s
authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted
Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or
Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.
Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or
otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or
materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If
Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or
removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay
the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a)
damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to
follow instructions according to the Owners Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the
carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been
altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d)
deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e)
damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/
noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of
alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original
Owner and is not transferable.
In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted
Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact
Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local
authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer
has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website
at www.Yamaha.com
. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of
the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase
document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found
ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon
receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.
Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER
EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.
YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT
YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to
state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to
assume for it any other express warranty.
If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact:
CUSTOMER SERVICE
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373
Telephone: 800-854-1569
www.yamaha.com
Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA.
©2009 Yamaha Corporation of America.
(US only)
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
3
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter).
DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other
than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically
recommended by Yamaha.
WARNING:
Do not place this product in a position where anyone could
walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any
kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an
extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG.
NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling
capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.
This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a
cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is
used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-
pany the accessory product.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at
the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or
modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update
existing units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and
headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels
that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long
periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfort-
able. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you
should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before
damage occurs.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory
mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as
optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer
assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and
any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE
using.
Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other
uses are recommended.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a
function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are
not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the
owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult
your dealer before requesting service.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and envi-
ronmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keep-
ing with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be
aware of the following:
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if
applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-
tery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary,
contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these
may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a
rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being
charged.
When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and
never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed cor-
rectly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and
battery case rupture.
Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all bat-
teries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of
household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some rea-
son its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all
local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of prod-
ucts that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable
to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model
number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this
plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the
date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual
as a permanent record of your purchase.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-BP (bottom)
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
4
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-
circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and
do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it,
or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything
over it.
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage
is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Use the specified adaptor (page 68) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in
damage to the instrument or overheating.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have
accumulated on it.
This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument
or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any
openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power
immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the
instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together
with old ones.
Do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or
batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same
maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage.
Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries.
Do not dispose of batteries in fire.
Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.
Keep batteries away from children.
If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid
should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with
water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss
of sight or chemical burns.
Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity
markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid
leakage.
When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time,
remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery
fluid.
When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch
and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries,
remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by
Yamaha service personnel.
• The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.
• It emits unusual smells or smoke.
• Some object has been dropped into the instrument.
• There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the
instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the
outlet.
When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the
plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for
extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily
accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power
switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is
turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When
you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord
from the wall AC outlet.
Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack,
use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal
components or result in the instrument falling over.
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components,
set all volume levels to minimum.
Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and
gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired
listening level.
Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or
keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the
instrument or other property, or operational failure.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a
high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.
If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
Battery
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Location
Connections
Handling caution
DMI-3 1/2
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
5
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the power switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make
sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.
NOTICE
To avoid the possibility of malfunction/damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the
notices below.
Handling and Maintenance
Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio
may generate noise.
Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day)
to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° –
40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)
Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.
When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Saving data
Some data items (page 40) are automatically saved as backup data in the internal memory even if you turn the power off. Saved data may be lost due to
malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external device such as a computer (page 45).
About copyrights
Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal
use.
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use
others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and
sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of
copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
About functions/data bundled with the instrument
Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.
About this manual
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your
instrument.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft
®
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Apple, Mac and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the
unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below
and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid
identification in the event of theft.
Model No.
Serial No.
(bottom)
DMI-3 2/2
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
6
This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.
Included Documents
Owner’s Manual (this book)
Online Materials (Downloadable from the web)
The following instructional materials are available for downloading from the Yamaha website.
Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
Access the Yamaha Manual Library, then enter your model name (PSR-E333, for example) in the Model Name
area to search the manuals.
MIDI Data Format
This document contains both the MIDI Data Format and the MIDI Implementation Chart.
MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish)
If you want to know more about MIDI and how to use it, refer to this introductory book.
Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
You can refer to the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete
the user registration at the above website.
Song book (only in English, French, German and Spanish)
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI
standard which ensures that any GM-compatible
music data can be accurately played by any GM-
compatible tone generator, regardless of manufac-
turer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and
hardware products that support GM System Level.
XGlite
As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified ver-
sion of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation
format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song
data using an XGlite tone generator. However,
keep in mind that some songs may play back dif-
ferently compared to the original data, due to the
reduced set of control parameters and effects.
STYLE FILE
The Style File Format combines all of
Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into
a single unified format.
USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial
Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a
computer with peripheral devices. It allows
“hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices
while the power to the computer is on).
Touch Response
The exceptionally natural Touch Response fea-
ture, with a convenient front panel on/off
switch, gives you maximum expressive level
control over the voices.
• Owner’s manual (this book)
• Music rest
• AC Power Adaptor
* May not be included depending on your particular area.
Please check with your Yamaha dealer.
• My Yamaha Product User Registration
* The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when
you fill out the User Registration form.
About the Manuals
Formats and functions
Supplied Accessories Using the music rest
Insert the music
rest into the slots
as shown.
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
7
Contents
About the Manuals................................................ 6
Formats and functions .......................................... 6
Supplied Accessories ........................................... 6
Using the music rest ............................................. 6
Introduction
Setting Up 8
Power Requirements ............................................ 8
Connecting headphones and external audio
equipment........................................................ 9
Connecting a footswitch ....................................... 9
Turn on the power ................................................ 9
Auto Power Off function........................................ 9
Removing the protective film ................................ 9
Panel Controls and Terminals 10
Basic Operation and Displays 12
Basic Operation.................................................. 12
Display................................................................ 13
Reference
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 14
Select and Play a Voice...................................... 14
Playing the Grand Piano Voice........................... 15
Try playing with enhanced, dynamic sound
(Ultra-Wide Stereo)........................................ 15
Touch Response Sensitivity ............................... 15
Adding Harmony................................................. 16
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual........ 17
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right
Hands—Split.................................................. 17
Play with a Style 18
Select a Style Rhythm ........................................ 18
Play Along with a Style ....................................... 19
Pattern Variation (Sections)................................ 20
Chords ................................................................ 21
Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary . 22
Try Playing a Song with a Style!......................... 23
Play Using the Music Database.......................... 24
Playing Songs 25
Select and Listen to a Specific Song .................. 25
Listening to the Demo Songs ............................. 26
BGM Playback.................................................... 26
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause .. 27
Changing the Melody Voice................................ 27
Using the Lesson Feature 28
Keys to Success..................................................28
Listening, Timing and Waiting .............................31
Phrase Repeat ....................................................33
A-B Repeat..........................................................34
Mute ....................................................................34
Using the Metronome..........................................35
Changing the Tempo........................................... 35
Record Your Own Performance 36
Recording............................................................ 36
Recording to a Specific track ..............................37
Deleting User Songs ...........................................39
Backup and Initialization 40
Backup ................................................................40
Initialization ......................................................... 40
Function Settings 41
Select the item and change the value .................41
Connecting to a Computer 44
Connecting a Personal Computer ....................... 44
Transferring data between the instrument and
a computer .....................................................45
Registering Style Files ........................................ 46
Appendix
Troubleshooting.............................................47
Song Book Sample ........................................ 48
Voice List ........................................................ 58
Drum Kit List ..................................................62
Style List ......................................................... 64
Music Database List ...................................... 65
Song List......................................................... 66
Effect Type List .............................................. 67
Specifications................................................. 68
Index................................................................ 69
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
8
Setting Up
Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.
Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an
AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not
deplete resources.
Using an AC Power Adaptor
1 Make sure that the [ ] (Standby/On) switch of the
instrument is off (the backlit display is off).
2 Connect the AC power adaptor to the power supply
jack.
3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.
Using Batteries
1 Open the battery compartment cover located on the
instrument’s bottom panel.
2 Insert the six new alkaline batteries, being careful
to follow the polarity markings on the side of the
compartment.
3 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it
locks firmly in place.
For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V
AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batter-
ies are recommended.) When battery power becomes too
low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the
sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur.
When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries,
following the precautions listed below.
If necessary, also make sure to save all important User
data (see page 45), since custom panel settings are lost
when the batteries are removed.
Power Requirements
• Use the specified adaptor (page 68). The use of other
adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the
adaptor and the instrument.
• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the
instrument, or during electrical storms.
• Never connect or disconnect the AC power adaptor when the
batteries are installed in the instrument and the power is on.
Doing so will turn the power off, possibly resulting in loss of
the data being transferred as well as the data currently in the
transfer destination during transferring or recording of data.
WARNING
CAUTION
AC outlet
AC power
adaptor
3
2
NOTICE
Make sure to install the batteries with the proper orientation,
maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery
installation may result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive
chemicals.
When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of
six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use
different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the
same time.
If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the
batteries from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from
the battery.
Use alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of batteries
(including rechargeable batteries) may have sudden drops of
power when battery power becomes low, possibly resulting in
loss of data in the flash memory.
Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash
memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained
rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become
drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred
and the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost.
WARNING
NOTICE
Introduction
Setting Up
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
9
Make all necessary connections BEFORE turning the power on.
You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a set
of headphones, keyboard amplifier, stereo system,
mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device
to send the instrument’s output signal to that device.
The internal speakers are automatically shut off when
a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUT-
PUT jack also functions as an external output.
The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain
as you play by pressing an optional footswitch. Plug
the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into the SUS-
TAIN jack and use it to switch sustain on and off.
Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER
VOLUME] control to the left and press the [ ]
(Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. While
playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by using
the [MASTER VOLUME] control. Pressing the [ ]
(Standby/On) switch again turns the power off.
To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instru-
ment features an Auto Power Off function that automati-
cally turns the power off if the instrument is not operated
for a specified period of time. The amount of time that
will elapse before the power is automatically turned off
can be set in the Function (page 43 Function 040).
Setting range: 5/10/15/30/60/120/OFF (minutes)
Default setting: 30 (minutes)
To disable the Auto Power Off function
While holding down the lowest key, press the [ ]
(Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. Alternately
select “Off” in the Function settings.
Remove the transparent protective film that was applied
to the display prior to shipment from the factory.
Connecting headphones and
external audio equipment
• You can set the Master equalizer (EQ) which is provided to
give you the best possible sound when listening through dif-
ferent reproduction systems. The Master equalizer (EQ) can
be set in the Function settings (page 42 Function 023).
• Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for
long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear
fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing.
• To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the
external devices at the minimum setting and turn power off
the devices before connecting them. Failure to observe
these precautions may result in electric shock or equip-
ment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all
devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the vol-
ume controls while playing the instrument to set the
desired listening level.
Connecting a footswitch
• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to
the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.
• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing
this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, result-
ing in reversed footswitch operation.
NOTE
CAUTION
CAUTION
NOTE
Turn on the power
• When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a
small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the
instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long
time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall
AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument.
Auto Power Off function
• The data and settings are always backed up, and are main-
tained even when the power is turned off. For information on
the backup parameters, see page 40.
Removing the protective film
CAUTION
NOTE
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
10
Panel Controls and Terminals
Front Panel
q [ ] (Standby/On) switch..................................... page 9
w [MASTER VOLUME] control ................................page 9
e [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button .... page 31
r [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button.............................page 28
t [PHRASE REPEAT] button ................................page 33
y PART
[L] button ............................................................ page 32
[R] button............................................................ page 32
y [REC TRACK 2] button.......................................page 37
[REC TRACK 1] button.......................................page 37
u [METRONOME] button....................................... page 35
i [TEMPO/TAP] button.......................................... page 35
o [SONG] button............................................ pages 12, 25
!0 [VOICE] button ........................................... pages 12, 14
!1 [STYLE] button........................................... pages 12, 18
!2 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+/YES], [-/NO]........... page 12
!3 [FUNCTION] button............................................ page 41
!4 [DEMO/BGM] button .......................................... page 26
!5 [A-B REPEAT] button ......................................... page 34
!6 [REW] button ......................................................page 27
!7 [FF] button ..........................................................page 27
!8 [PAUSE] button................................................... page 27
!5 [ACMP ON/OFF] button ..................................... page 19
!6 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button...............................page 20
!7 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button..................................page 20
!8 [SYNC START] button ........................................ page 19
!9 [START/STOP] button ................................ pages 12, 25
@0 [REC] button.......................................................page 36
@1 [PORTABLE GRAND] button...
.......................... page 15
@2 [MUSIC DATABASE] button...............................page 24
@3 [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button ........................ page 15
@4 [SPLIT] button .................................................... page 17
@5 [DUAL] button..................................................... page 17
@6 [HARMONY] button............................................ page 16
@7 [TOUCH] button.................................................. page 15
@8 Drum Kit icons ................................................... page 14
Rear Panel
@9 SUSTAIN jack ....................................................... page 9
#0 USB terminal ...................................................... page 44
#1 PHONES/OUTPUT jack........................................ page 9
#2 DC IN jack .............................................................page 8
In the Lesson mode
In the Recording mode
In the Song mode
In the Style mode
w
q
e
r
t
!5
!7
!6
!8
@8
Front Panel
Music Database List
(page 65)
Panel Controls and Terminals
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
11
Rear Panel
Display (page 13) Song List (page 66) Style List (page 64)
Voice List (page 58)
C3 (Middle C)
The “Press & Hold” Symbol
Buttons having this indication can
be used to call up an alternate
function when the relevant button
is pressed and held. Hold down this button
until the function is called up.
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
12
Basic Operation and Displays
Press a button to select a basic function: Voice, Style or Song. To change the instrument voice that sounds when
you play the keyboard, press the [VOICE] button. If you want to play along with auto accompaniment, press the
[STYLE] button. If you want to listen to a song, press the [SONG] button.
1
Select a basic function.
[SONG] button ..............To select a Song.
[VOICE] button..............To select a Voice.
[STYLE] button..............To select a Style.
When you select a basic function, the name and number of the currently selected Song, Style or Voice is shown.
2
Select an item or value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Refer to the Song, Voice and Style Lists on pages 58–66.
3
Start a function or play the keyboard.
Voice ............................. Play the keyboard.
Song ............................. Press the [START/STOP] button to play Songs.
Style.............................. Press the [START/STOP] button to play the Style rhythm.
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.
Basic Operation
GrandPno
001
001
321
Display
(page 13)
Number buttons [0]–[9]
The number buttons can be
used to directly enter a
Song, Style or Voice num-
ber or parameter value.
For numbers that start with
one or two zeroes, the first
zeroes can be omitted.
Example:
Selecting Voice 002,
Bright Piano.
Press number buttons
[0], [0], [2].
[+], [-] buttons
Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value
by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease
the value by 1. Press and hold either button to
continuously increase or decrease the value in
the corresponding direction.
Press briefly to
decrease.
Press briefly to
increase.
Basic Operation and Displays
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
13
Display
GrandPno
001
003
Indicate the operating condition of the
instrument (page 12).
SONG/VOICE/STYLE
Displays the melody
and chord notes of a
Song when the Song
lesson function is in
use, or the notes of
chords you specify
when the Dictionary
function is in use. At
other times the notes
you play on the key-
board are displayed.
Notation
• Any notes occurring below or
above the staff are indicated by
“8va” in the notation.
• For a few specific chords, not all
notes may be shown in the nota-
tion section of the display. This is
due to space limitations in the dis-
play.
NOTE
Appears when the Keys to Suc-
cess function is on (page 28).
Appears when the Phrase
Repeat function is on (page
33).
Song:
✩✩
✩✩
✩✩✩
The number of stars
depends on the number
of passed steps.
Step:
KEYS TO SUCCESS
PHRASE REPEAT
Passing Status
Appears when Touch Response is
on (page 15).
Appears when ULTRA-WIDE
STEREO is on (page 15).
Appears when the auto accompa-
niment is on (page 19).
Appears when the Split function is
on (page 17).
Appears when the Dual function is
on (page 17).
Appears when the Harmony func-
tion is on (page 16).
TOUCH RESPONSE
ULTRA-WIDE STEREO
ACMP ON
SPLIT
DUAL
HARMONY
Indicates the name of
the chord currently
being played back, or
the name of the chord
being played on the keyboard.
Indicates the current measure
during playback of a Song.
Chord Display
Measure
003
Indicates the Function number when
the Function is in use.
Indicates notes currently being
played. Indicates the melody and
chord notes of a Song when the Song
lesson function is in use. Also indi-
cates the notes of a chord—either
when playing a chord or when using
the Dictionary function.
Function
Keyboard Display
027
Information related to the Song/
recording tracks is shown here.
(See pages 34 and 36.)
Lit: Track contains data
Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data
Flashing: Track is selected as recording
track
Indicates the beat of the current
Style or Song with flashing
arrows.
Song/recording track display
Beat Display
The Main display shows all of the current basic settings for Song, Style and
Voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status for
various functions.
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
14
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
This instrument features a variety of realistic, built-in voices. The grand piano Voice is
automatically selected whenever the power is turned on, but you can easily change
this to guitar, drums, or any of an extensive range of voices.
Press the [VOICE] button and then select the desired Voice, referring to the section “Basic Operation” on page 12
for instructions.
Refer to the Voice List on page 58.
Preset Voice Types
Select and Play a Voice
GrandPno
001
001
Voice
Grand Piano Voice Ultra-Wide
Stereo
Touch Response
Percussion and drum icons
001–140 Instrument Voices
141–153 (Drum Kit)
Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, from
which they can be played. Details on the instruments and key assignments of
each Drum Kit can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 62.
154–497 XGlite Voices
000
One Touch Setting (OTS)
The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most suitable Voice
for you when you select a Style or Song. Simply select Voice number “000” to
activate this feature.
GrandPno
001
001
Voice name
The Voice shown here becomes the
Main Voice for the instrument.
Voice number
Reference
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
15
When you simply want to play a piano Voice, all you have to do is press one convenient button.
Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.
The Voice “Grand Piano” will automatically be selected as the Main Voice.
You can play the keyboard with a spacious, dynamic sound effect that gives you the sensation of hearing the sound
outside of the speakers.
Turn on the Ultra-Wide Stereo effect, and hear the sound expand around you—as if the speaker position is outside
of the instrument.
Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button.
To turn ULTRA-WIDE STEREO off, press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button
again.
Press the [TOUCH] button to turn Touch Response on. When Touch Response is on,
you can control the volume of notes according to how hard you play the keys.
Touch Response is normally on.
Press the [TOUCH] button again to turn Touch Response off. When Touch Response
is off, the same volume will be produced no matter how hard you play the keys.
Playing the Grand Piano Voice
Try playing with enhanced, dynamic sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo)
• The wide effect type can be
set in the Function settings
(page 42 Function 024).
SHORTCUT
You can jump directly to the
Functions Settings by press-
ing and holding the [ULTRA-
WIDE STEREO] button for
longer than a second.
NOTE
GrandPno
001
Appears when Ultra-Wide Stereo is on.
Touch Response Sensitivity
• The Touch Response func-
tion cannot be used for
some Voices (such as
organ), even if the Touch
Response icon appears in
the display.
• When Touch Response is on
you can adjust the key-
board’s sensitivity to dynam-
ics in three steps in the
Function settings (page 41
Function 006).
SHORTCUT
You can jump directly to the
Function settings by press-
ing and holding the
[TOUCH] button for longer
than a second.
NOTE
GrandPno
001
Appears when Touch Response is on.
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
16
This feature adds harmony notes as well as tremolo or echo effects to the Main Voice.
1
Press the [HARMONY] button to turn Harmony on.
When you don’t want to add harmony notes, press the [HARMONY] button
again to turn Harmony off.
2
Press and hold the [HARMONY] button for longer than a second.
“HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the Harmony
Type.
3
Select a desired Harmony type by using the number buttons
[0]–[9], [+], [-].
Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 67.
Try playing the keyboard with the Harmony function. The effect and operation
of each Harmony Type is different—refer to the section “How to sound each
Harmony type” below as well as the Harmony Type list for details.
You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 42 Function
026).
Adding Harmony
• When you press the [HAR-
MONY] button to turn this
feature on, the appropriate
Harmony type for the cur-
rently selected Main Voice is
automatically selected.
NOTE
GrandPno
001
Appears when
Harmony is on.
• You can also access the
Harmony Type setting dis-
play by pressing the [FUNC-
TION] button several times
(page 42 Function 025).
• Harmony will be turned off if
the Chord Dictionary func-
tion is used.
NOTE
Trio
02
Currently selected Harmony type
• The Harmony notes can be
added only to the Main
Voice, not to Dual or Split
Voices.
• The keys left of the Split
Point of the keyboard pro-
duce no Harmony notes
when auto accompaniment
is on (ACMP ON is lit).
NOTE
How to sound each Harmony type
• Harmony type 01–05 • Harmony type 13–19 (Tremolo)
• Harmony type 06–12 (Trill) • Harmony type 20–26 (Echo)
Press the right-hand keys while playing
chords in the auto accompaniment
range of the keyboard when auto
accompaniment is on (page 19).
Keep holding
down the keys.
Hold down two keys.
Play the keys.
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
17
You can select a second Voice which will play in addition to the Main Voice selected on page 12. This second
Voice is known as the Dual Voice.
Press the [DUAL] button to turn the Dual function on.
When Dual is on, you can play a Dual Voice in a layer with the Main Voice.
To turn the Dual Voice off and play only the Main Voice, press the [DUAL] button
again.
In the Split mode you can play different Voices to the left and right of the keyboard “Split Point.
The main and Dual Voices can be played to the right of the Split Point, while the Voice played to the left of the
Split Point is known as the “Split Voice”
Press the [SPLIT] button to turn the Split function on.
When Split is on you can play a Split Voice to the left of the Split Point.
When you don’t want to play a Split Voice, press the [SPLIT] button to turn Split off.
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual
Two Voices sound at the same time
• The Dual Voice setting can
be changed in the Function
settings (page 42 Function
011).
SHORTCUT
You can jump directly to the
Function settings by pressing
and holding the [DUAL] button
for longer than a second.
• When you select a Voice of
the “DUAL” category
(123–132), Dual is turned on
automatically.
NOTE
Flute
001
Appears when
dual is on
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split
36 48
60 72 84
Split Voice
Main Voice and Dual Voice
Split Point ...... default setting: 54 (F#2)
• The Split Voice setting can
be changed in the Function
settings (page 42 Function
015).
SHORTCUT
You can jump directly to the
Function settings by pressing
and holding the [SPLIT] button
for longer than a second.
• The Split Point setting can
be changed in the Function
Settings (page 41 Function
005).
NOTE
Choir
001
Appears when
Split is on.
Adding other effects to the sound
You can also play the sounds of the instrument adding Reverb, Chorus and Sustain.
The best-suited Reverb and Chorus type is automatically selected whenever you select a Song or Style, but you
can select any of the available Reverb or Chorus Types. These effects can be set in the Function settings (page
42). Refer to the Reverb and Chorus Type lists on page 67 for details.
Reverb........................This effect adds the ambience of a room or concert hall to the sound.
Chorus........................This effect makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious.
Panel Sustain .............This function adds a fixed sustain to the keyboard Voices.
The sustain function can also be applied with the optional footswitch (page 9).
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
18
Play with a Style
This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment
(rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your
left hand. You can select from 106 different styles covering a range of musical genres
and time signatures.
Most Styles include a rhythm part. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played
using percussion instruments only.
Press the [STYLE] button and then select the desired Style, referring to the section “Basic Operation” on page 12
for instructions.
Refer to the Style List on page 64.
Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the Style rhythm.
Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback.
Select a Style Rhythm
GrandPno
001
001
5
Press the [STYLE] button to access the
Style Functions (printed below).
2
1
3
• To adjust the tempo of the
Style, see page 35.
NOTE
8BtModrn
001
001
Style number Style name
• Since the Pianist category
Styles (098–106) have no
rhythm parts, no sound will
be produced if you start
rhythm-only playback.
To use these Styles, turn on
the auto accompaniment
and play the keyboard as
described on page 19 (The
bass and chord accompani-
ment parts will sound.)
NOTE
Play with a Style
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
19
Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompani-
ment that you can play along with.
1
Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired Style.
For instructions on how to select a Style, see page 12.
2
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn automatic accompani-
ment on.
Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off.
3
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the Sync Start function on.
4
Start playing.
Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the Auto Accompani-
ment range of the keyboard. Try playing other chords with your left hand and
play a melody with your right hand.
5
Stop playing.
Playback will stop as soon as you press the [START/STOP] button.
You can also stop playing by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button so that
an appropriate ending pattern will play and then Style playback will stop (page
20).
Play Along with a Style
• You can also select commer-
cially available Style Files.
To do this load the Style
Files from the computer to
the instrument, and then
register the style data start-
ing with Style number 107
(page 46). If the Style File
has not been registered,
“No data” will be displayed
when selecting Style num-
ber 107.
NOTE
LoveSong
001
Appears when auto
accompaniment is on
• The Split Point setting can
be changed in the Function
settings (page 41 Function
005).
NOTE
When auto accompaniment is on ...
The keys to the left of the Split Point (54; F#2) will play only chords. This is
known as the “Auto Accompaniment range.
36 48
7260
Split Point........default setting: 54 (F#2)
Auto
Accompaniment
range
LoveSong
018
001
Flashes when Sync Start is on.
• You can also press the
[START/STOP] button to
begin the rhythm of the
selected Style. The bass
and chords will begin play-
ing as soon as you play a
key in the Auto Accompani-
ment range of the keyboard.
NOTE
• The Style Volume can be
adjusted in the Function set-
tings (page 41 Function
001).
SHORTCUT
You can jump directly to the
Function settings by pressing
and holding the [STYLE] but-
ton for longer than a second.
NOTE
Play with a Style
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
20
The instrument features a wide variety of Style “Sections” (patterns) that allow you to vary the
arrangement of the accompaniment to match the Song you are playing.
Pattern Variation (Sections)
Adding an Intro
Pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button before playing back the
Style automatically adds a short introduction before starting the
actual (Main) rhythm.
When the intro finishes playing, Style playback shifts to the Main
Section.
Adding an Ending
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button to begin playing an ending
Section. Playback will stop when the ending has played all the way
through.
If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button a second time (while
the ending is playing) the ending will play ritardando (the tempo will
gradually get slower).
Switching Main Sections
There are two variations on the basic Section
(A and B).
This switches between the Main A and Main B
Sections, automatically playing a fill-in pattern
to smoothly lead into the next Section.
You can also select either the Main A or B
Section to start by pressing the [MAIN/AUTO
FILL] button before starting the Style.
Adding a Fill-in
A Fill-in pattern is automatically added before
changing to Section A or B.
Recommended method for using Sections
Setup
1. Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style.
2. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on.
3. Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
4. Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to select Main A or Main B.
5. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Sync Start on.
You’re now ready to play the intro.
Start playing
6. As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts.
7. Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. (Switching Main Sections/Adding a Fill-in)
Ending
8. Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. (Adding an Ending)
An appropriate ending Section will play and then Style playback will stop.
You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again
while the ending is playing back.
Play with a Style
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
21
For users who are new to chords, this chart conveniently shows common chords for your reference. Since there are
many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books
for further details. You can also look up chords using the Chord Dictionary function in this instrument (page 22).
Indicates the root note.
• Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions: m7, m7
b
5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7
b
5, 6(9), sus2
Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted.
• Sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only.
If you play a chord which does not exist, the name of chord is not shown in the display, and the Style plays back only rhythm and bass.
Chords
Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh
C
Cm
7
C
Cm
7
CM
7
D
Dm
7
D
Dm
7
DM
7
E
Em
7
E
Em
7
EM
7
C
F
Fm
7
F
Fm
7
FM
7
G
Gm
7
G
Gm
7
GM
7
A
Am
7
A
Am
7
AM
7
B
Bm
7
B
Bm
7
BM
7
Easy Chords
This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three
fingers.
For root “C”
To play a major chord
Press the root note ()
of the chord.
To play a minor chord
Press the root note
together with the nearest
black key to the left of it.
To play a seventh chord
Press the root note
together with the nearest
white key to the left of it.
To play a minor seventh chord
Press the root note together with
the nearest white and black keys
to the left of it (three keys alto-
gether).
C
Cm
C
7
Cm
7
Play with a Style
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
22
The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord dictionary” that shows you the individual notes of chords.
This is convenient when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.
1
Press and hold the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button
for longer than a second.
“Dict.will appear in the display.
2
As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh)
chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled
“ROOT .” (The note doesnt sound.)
The root note you set is shown in the display.
3
Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard
labeled “CHORD TYPE .” (The note doesn’t sound.)
The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are
shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram.
To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons.
4
Try playing a chord in the auto accompaniment range (refer on
page 19) of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display.
When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and
the chord name in the display flashes.
Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary
Hold for longer
than a second.
Dict.
001
Keys for chord type
dictionary
Keys for root
dictionary
The highest key
• Major chords are usually
indicated by the root name
only. For example, the indi-
cation “C” in a score refers
to a “C Major” chord. To look
up the fingering for a major
chord press the root key and
then the M chord type key.
• These chords are not shown
in the Chord Dictionary func-
tion: 6(9), M7(9), M7(
#
11 ) ,
b
5, M7
b
5, M7aug, m7(11),
mM7(9), mM7
b
5, 7
b
5, sus2
NOTE
Dict.
001
Notation of chord
Chord name (root and type)
Individual notes of chord
(keyboard)
Play with a Style
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
23
Let’s try out the Song “Aura Lee.” For information on how to play Styles using chords, see pages 19 and 20.
Try playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand.
Practice
Aura Lee
Composer: G. Poulton
Try Playing a Song with a Style!
Recommended Style: 018 Love Song
Recommended Voice: 047 String Ensemble
A
CD
7
D
E
G
A
CD
7
D
E
G
Standard Chords
Easy Chords
Play with a Style
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
24
You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best Voice and Style for the
type of music you want to play, simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings
will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style!
1
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
A Music Database name will appear in the display.
2
Select a Music Database.
Referring to the Music Database category list printed on the panel, select a
Music Database that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For
example, select one from the “SWING&JAZZ” category (047–056) if you want
to play jazz.
3
Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right.
A jazz Style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the
Split Point (page 19). Refer to page 21 for information about playing chords.
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.
You can also stop playback by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button (page
20).
Play Using the Music Database
AlvFever
001
Refer to the Music Database
List on page 65.
NOTE
MoonLit
051
001
• The Split Point setting can
be changed in the Function
settings (page 41 Function
005).
NOTE
36 48
7260
Split Point........default setting: 54 (F#2)
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
25
Playing Songs
This instrument has 102 built-in Songs. For this instrument, the term “Song” refers to
the data that makes up a piece of music. Try selecting and listening to the various Songs.
Press the [SONG] button and then select the desired Song, referring to the section
“Basic Operation” on page 12 for instructions.
Refer to the Song List on page 66.
Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the Song.
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.
GrandPno
001
001
SongStart/Stop DEMO/BGM
Press the [SONG] button to access the SONG
functions (printed above the buttons).
Select and Listen to a Specific Song
• Song number “004” is automat-
ically selected whenever the
power is turned ON. When you
want to select one of the Song
numbers 001–003, use the
number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
• To adjust the tempo of song
playback, see page 35.
• You can adjust the balance
between Song playback and
the notes you play on the key-
board by setting the volume of
the playback sound (page 41
Function 002).
SHORTCUT
You can jump directly to the
Function settings by pressing
and holding the [SONG] button
for longer than a second.
NOTE
Demo 1
001
005
Song number Song name
These demonstration songs showcase the various sounds of the instrument.
Each of these songs has two variations: an easy one which even beginners can
practice with ease, and another more challenging version.
We’ve collected various folk songs from around the world which have been
handed down from through the generations, as well as famous classical pieces.
Try playing the melody of these songs with your right hand.
Enjoy performing a piece with Style accompaniment (automatic accompani-
ment data). (Keys to Success is designed so that you master playing the melody
with your right hand first, and then learn the roots of the chords with your left
hand.)
These songs feature solo instruments other than piano—letting you enjoy play-
ing other instrumental voices along with orchestral accompaniment.
These included famous pieces from around the world along with well-known
piano pieces. Enjoy the beautiful, resonant piano sound as you play solo or
along with orchestral backing.
Playing Songs
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
26
Press the [DEMO] button.
Songs 001, 002, 003 play in sequence, and playback will continue repeatedly starting again from the first Song
001.
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] or [START/STOP] button.
With the default setting only a few of the internal songs are played back and repeated when the [DEMO/BGM]
button is pressed. This setting can be changed so that all internal songs are played, or all songs transferred to the
instrument from a computer are played.
Four playback group settings are provided. Simply select the one that suits your needs.
1
Press and hold the [DEMO/BGM] button for longer than a sec-
ond.
“DemoGrp” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the currently
selected repeat playback target will be displayed.
2
Use the [+] or [-] button to select a repeat playback group from the
table below.
3
Press the [DEMO/BGM] button.
The songs in the group selected play in sequence.
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] or [START/STOP]
button.
Listening to the Demo Songs
BGM Playback
• You can also set the demo
group in the Function set-
tings (page 43 Function
037).
NOTE
Hold for longer than a second.
• When User songs and
Download songs data do
not exist, Demo songs are
played back.
NOTE
Demo Preset songs (001–003)
Preset All preset songs (001–102)
User All User songs (103–107)
Download All songs transferred from a computer (108–)
• You can select a song by
using the [+] button after
pressing the [DEMO/BGM]
button. The [-] button can be
used to go back to the
beginning of the selected
song.
NOTE
Random Song Playback
The Random Play mode causes the songs in the group selected for BGM playback to be played back in random
order. (Demo group Songs [Preset Songs 001–003] cannot be played at random.)
The setting of the Random Play mode can be set in the Function settings (page 43 Function 038).
Playing Songs
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
27
These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward (FF), rewind
(REW) and pause (PAUSE) playback of the song.
[REW] button ........ Fast-reverses the Song if pressed during playback (no sound is
heard during fast reverse). Decreases the measure number if pressed
while playback is stopped.
[FF] button............. Fast-forwards the Song if pressed during playback. Increases the
measure number if pressed while playback is stopped.
[PAUSE] button..... Temporarily stops playback. Press this button a second time to
resume playback from the point at which it was stopped.
You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other Voice you prefer.
1
Select the Song and play it.
Refer to the section “Basic Operation” on page 12.
2
Select a desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
The selected Voice sounds when you play the keyboard.
3
Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second.
“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, indicating
that the Voice selected in Step 2 has replaced the Song’s original melody Voice.
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause
• When an A-B repeat (page
34) range is specified the
fast reverse and forward
function will only work within
that range.
• [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE]
button cannot be used dur-
ing Song playback by using
the [DEMO/BGM] button.
NOTE
NOTE
Changing the Melody Voice
• You cannot change the mel-
ody Voice of a User Song.
• When you select a Voice of
the DUAL category (123–
132), only the Voice whose
MIDI program change num-
ber is indicated in the Voice
List (page 59) is played.
NOTE
• If a Song has played
through and stopped during
this procedure, press the
[START/STOP] button to
start playback again.
NOTE
HnkyTonk
004
Hold for longer than a second.
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
28
Using the Lesson Feature
You can practice the preset Songs using these lesson functions: “Keys to Success,
“Listening, Timing, Waiting” and “Phrase Repeat.” Keys to Success helps you master a
Song, whereas Listening, Timing, Waiting helps you first master the timing then play-
ing the correct notes. Phrase Repeat lets you select and repeatedly practice a specific
phrase in the Song. If you’re using a keyboard instrument for the first time, we suggest
you start with Keys to Success.
You can refer to the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To
obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website:
https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
In the “Keys to Success” mode, you can practice individual phrases in the Song (as “Steps”), letting you effec-
tively master the Song by mastering each phrase separately. Each time you finish a specific Step, your score is
shown in the display. Passing one Step (with a score of 60 or better) lets you go on to next one automatically. All
preset Songs other than 001–003 can be used with this mode, especially the “LEARN TO PLAY” category Songs
(004–019).
1
Select a song for your lesson.
For this example we’ll select song “Für Elise (Basic)” from the “LEARN TO
PLAY” category. For instructions on how to select a Song, see page 12.
2
Turn Keys to Success on.
Pressing the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button turns the Keys to Success feature
on, and a Step of the Song is automatically selected for your practice. The cur-
rently selected Step number and the lesson parts are shown in the display.
Keys to Success
GrandPno
001
001
1342
• The score for “Für Elise
(Basic)” is provided on page
48.
• Song numbers 001 to 003
cannot be used for the Les-
son feature. If you select one
of these Songs, “NoLes-
son” is shown in the display.
NOTE
Elise 1
004
• The total number of Steps
varies depending on the
Song.
• Each lesson part varies
depending on the Steps.
NOTE
Step01
Appears when Keys to Success is on
Lesson part
: Right-hand lesson
: Left-hand lesson
: Both-hands lesson
Current Step number
Using the Lesson Feature
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
29
3
Start the Lesson.
Press the [START/STOP] button to start Lesson. After the lead-in, Step 01 of the
song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes appear in the display.
You can start playing along on the keyboard as soon as the lead-in finishes.
The score marker and keyboard marker in the display will indicate the notes to
play.
Each time you have practiced all the way through a Step, your performance will
be evaluated and your score (from 0–100) is shown in the display.
You can select another Step as desired by using the [+]/[-] buttons.
All songs have a finishing Step, and in that Step, you will practice all the way
thorough the song which you have selected as a lesson Song in Step 1. When
you pass all Steps, the Keys to Success mode will automatically be turned off
and playback stops.
4
Stop Lesson.
You can stop the Lesson at any time by pressing the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] but-
ton.
• In some Steps, the lead-in
may run a little slower than
normal because a ritar-
dando or fermata section is
placed before the Step.
• You can practice the speci-
fied phrase using the Les-
son modes “1 Listening,” “2
Timing” or “3 Waiting”
described on page 31. In
these Lesson modes with
the Keys to Success func-
tion, however, it is not possi-
ble to pass the Step. When
you want to turn off these
Lesson modes, press the [1
LISTENING 2 TIMING 3
WAITING] button a number
of times to select off (“Step
number” will appear in the
display).
• If the specified part is both
hands, you cannot pass the
Step until you play both
hands, even if you play one
of the hands well. Only a
message such as “L-part is
Nice” appears in the display.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Score of
0–59
Try the same Step again. The same Step begins automatically.
Score of
60–100
You passed! The next Step begins automatically.
Step01
001
Excellen
068
Displayed when you’ve
passed the Step.
• When you want to select
another Song during a les-
son, press the [SONG] but-
ton to call up the currently
selected Song name in the
display (for three seconds),
then select the Song as
required using the [+]/[-]
buttons or number buttons
while the Song name
appears. When you select
the new Song, the lowest
number Step not yet passed
of the Song will automati-
cally be selected for the Les-
son.
NOTE
Elise 1
004
001
Using the Lesson Feature
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
30
Entering and Clearing the Passing Status
Entering
Passing status will automatically be entered and shown in the display when the Step
or Song is selected. You can recognize at a glance whether or not you’ve passed the
selected Step or Song.
When Step is selected
When Song is selected
Clearing
You can clear existing passing status entries. Select the desired Song or Step for
clearing the passing status and hold the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button for longer
than three seconds. After the passing status has been cleared, a “Cleared” message
will appear on the display. Once the operation has been completed, no information
will appear even when selecting the Song or Step.
Step01
001
: Passed
No information: Not yet passed
Elise 1
004
001
✩✩ : There are one or more Steps not yet passed in
addition to the last Step
: Only last Step passed
✩✩: All Steps passed other than last Step
✩✩✩ : All Steps passed
• You cannot clear any entries
during Song or Step play-
back. If a Song or Step is
currently being played back,
stop playback first.
• Deleting the recorded Song
will delete all Step passing
status entries as well.
NOTE
Cleared
Hold for longer than
three seconds
Using the Lesson Feature
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
31
You can select any Song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands
lesson. Song Lesson lets you learn how to play Songs in three easy steps.
The Lesson modes:
1 Listening
There’s no need to play the keyboard in this mode. The model melody/chords (in
other words, the musical material you should learn) of the part you selected will
sound. Listen to it carefully and learn it well.
2 Timing
In this mode, try playing the notes with the correct timing. Simply concentrate on
playing each note in time with the rhythmic accompaniment. The correct notes
sound even if you play wrong notes as long as you play in time with the rhythm. Play
the notes shown in the display.
3 Waiting
In this mode, try playing the correct notes. The notes you should play appear in the
score and the keyboard on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note.
Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will
slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace and
tempo.
Listening, Timing and Waiting
Songs that can be used with
the Lesson feature include
Songs transferred from a
computer to flash memory
(SMF Format 0 only; see
page 45). The procedure for
transferring songs are
described on page 45.
• User Songs cannot be used
for the lesson.
NOTE
LISTEN
004
The notation and key positions of the model melody are
shown in the display.
TIMING
004
• When you don’t want to
change the Song playback
tempo, or you want to learn
using the original tempo,
you can change the setting
in the Function settings
(page 43 Function 036).
NOTE
WAITING
004
Using the Lesson Feature
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
32
Lesson Operation
1
Select the desired Song for your lesson.
For instructions on how to select a Song, see page 12.
2
Select the part you want to practice.
Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand lesson, or
press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a both-hands lesson.
The selected part is displayed.
3
Select the Lesson mode.
Each time the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button is pressed the
lesson modes are selected in sequence: 1 Listening 2 Timing 3 Waiting
Off 1 Listening ...etc. The currently selected Lesson mode is shown in the
display.
4
Start Lesson.
Song playback will begin automatically when you select the Lesson mode, and
the appropriate notes appear in the display.
5
Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-
ton.
Grade
When the Lesson Song has played all the way through in Lesson mode “2 Timing”
or “3 Waiting,” your performance will be evaluated in four levels: OK, Good, Very
Good, or Excellent.
• The following songs are
intended for use as right-
hand lessons, and cannot
be used for left-hand or
both-hands lessons. If you
select a right-hand lesson
Song, a “No LPart” mes-
sage is shown in the display.
Song numbers:
020–050, 071–076, 079
• For songs transferred from a
computer, the “No LPart”
indication does not appear,
even when there is no left
hand part in the song.
NOTE
RightLeft
BothHand
Left-hand lesson Right-hand lesson
Both-hands lesson
• When the melody Voice of
the Song is changed, the
key position shown in the
display may be shifted (in
octave units), depending on
the Voice selected.
• You can select Lesson
modes by repeatedly press-
ing the [1 LISTENING 2 TIM-
ING 3 WAITING] button.
NOTE
NOTE
• You cannot use Dual or Split
Voices during lessons.
• The Split Point is fixed and it
cannot be changed. For the
left-hand lesson, it is fixed at
59 or B2; for the left-hand
chord lesson, it is fixed at 54
or F
#
2.
NOTE
Using the Lesson Feature
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
33
This function allows you to repeatedly practice difficult phrases, by selecting a
phrase and repeatedly play it back. You can also mute one of the parts, and practice
just the other part repeatedly. The specified phrase can also be practiced along with
the Lesson modes “1 Listening,” “2 Timing” or “3 Waiting” described on page 31.
Play the Song and press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button at the phrase you want to
repeat. The appropriate phrase number will appear in the display and, after a lead-in,
repeat playback will start.
Use the [+] or [-] buttons to select any phrase number in the Song, and stop repeat
playback by pressing the [PHRASE REPEAT] button. The Phrase Repeat mode will
be canceled and normal playback of the Song will continue.
Specifying extended, multiple phrases
You can specify an extended section for repeating (including multiple phrases) by
specifying a beginning phrase (point A) and ending phrase (point B), using the [A-B
REPEAT] button. You can do this either during playback or while playback is
stopped.
Press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning phrase of the section you want to
repeat (point A), use the [+]/[-] buttons to select the subsequent phrases you wish to
include in the repeat, then press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second time. This spec-
ifies the last phrase selected as the end phrase (point B) for Phrase Repeat playback.
“REPEAT” will appear on the display and the specified A-B section of the Song will
now play repeatedly. (If playback is stopped, press the [START/STOP] button to
start.)
Stop A-B Repeat playback by pressing the [PHRASE REPEAT] button.
“REPEAT” will appear on the display and the currently selected phrase will play-
back repeatedly.
Phrase Repeat
• When you want to turn the
Phrase Repeat function on,
please make sure that the
Keys to Success mode is off,
since Phrase Repeat is not
available in the Keys to Suc-
cess mode.
• When you want to change
the Song, first turn off the
Phrase Repeat function then
select the Song.
• If you use the Phrase
Repeat function with the
Lesson modes “1 Listening,
“2 Timing” or “3 Waiting”, the
evaluation function of these
Lesson modes is not avail-
able. When you want to turn
these Lesson modes off,
press the [1 LISTENING 2
TIMING 3 WAITING] button
a number of times to select
off (“Phrase number” will
appear in the display).
NOTE
NOTE
Phrase mark
Repeat playback of this section
REPEAT
P03
Appears when the Phrase Repeat function is on
Phrase number
• Specifying only Point A
results in repeat playback
between Point A and the
end of the Song.
NOTE
Using the Lesson Feature
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
34
This function lets you specify a section of a Song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat
playback.
Play the Song and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section
you want to repeat (the “A” point), then press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second
time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). The specified A-B
section of the Song will now play repeatedly.
You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.
An “oFF REPEAT” message appears on the display. The A-B REPEAT mode will be
canceled and normal playback of the Song will continue.
The Song is made up by several tracks.
You can mute Track 1 or Track 2 during Song playback. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as
desired, allowing you to listen to the corresponding part (the part that is turned on), or practice the corresponding
part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard.
• Track 1 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 1] button during Song playback.
• Track 2 or style track can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 2] button during Song playback.
You can cancel the mute function by pressing the corresponding track buttons, [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] again
during Song playback, or by selecting any other Song.
A-B Repeat
AB
Repeat playback of this section
• The repeat start and end
points can be specified in
one-measure increments.
• You can also set the A-B
Repeat function when the
Song is stopped. Simply use
the [REW] and [FF] buttons
to select the desired mea-
sures, pressing the [A-B
REPEAT] button for each
point, then start playback.
• If you want to set the start
point “A” at the very begin-
ning of the Song press the
[A-B REPEAT] button before
starting playback of the
Song.
NOTE
REPEAT
A−b
• The A-B Repeat function will
be canceled when you
select another Song mode.
NOTE
Mute
FrereJac
020
010
Pressing one of the Track
buttons [TRACK 1] or
[TRACK 2] will mute the
corresponding track during
Song playback.
Lit: Track contains data. Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data.
Using the Lesson Feature
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
35
The instrument features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) that is convenient for prac-
ticing.
Press the [METRONOME] button to start the metronome.
To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again.
You can adjust the metronome tempo by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button (see
next section).
Songs and Styles can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow.
1
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in
the display.
2
Set the Tempo by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Tap Start
You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the
[TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—four times for time signatures in 4, and three
times for time signatures in 3—and the selected Song and Style rhythm will begin
playing at the tapped tempo.
You can change the tempo during Song or Style playback by pressing the button just
twice.
Using the Metronome
• You can set the time signa-
ture and the volume of the
Metronome (page 43 Func-
tion 031–033).
SHORTCUT
You can jump directly to the
Function settings by press-
ing and holding the [MET-
RONOME] button for longer
than a second.
• The metronome time signa-
ture will synchronize to a
style or song that is playing,
so these parameters cannot
be changed while a style or
song is playing.
NOTE
NOTE
Changing the Tempo
Tempo
070
Current Tempo value
• Press the [+] and [-] buttons
simultaneously to instantly
reset the value to the default
tempo.
NOTE
• In the case of a Style, the
selected Style rhythm will
begin playing at first. The
bass and chords will begin
playing as soon as you play
a chord in the auto accom-
paniment range of the key-
board (when auto
accompaniment is on).
• Tap tempo setting range:
32–280
NOTE
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
36
Record Your Own Performance
You can record up to five of your own performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song
numbers 103–107). Think of each User Song as a kind of basket or drawer for storing
your recordings. Remember that you can also record a Style (containing chord
changes) along with your own performance.
1
Press the [REC] button.
After you’ve selected the desired User Song for recording, you can select a Style
to be recorded as well. To do this, press the [STYLE] button and select the Style
number while the ACMP indication is on.
You can turn off the Record mode by pressing the [REC] button again
( and stop flashing).
2
Start recording.
When you play the keyboard, recording will begin.
By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when auto accompaniment is set to
on, the Style starts sounding and is recorded with your performance.
When auto accompaniment is set to off, only your keyboard performance is
recorded.
Recording
• If all User Songs (Song
numbers 103–107) contain
recorded data, Song 103
will automatically be
selected. In this case, you
will record over and erase
any previous data in Song
103, so be careful that you
won’t be erasing any mate-
rial you want to keep!
NOTICE
User 1
rEC
001
The lowest-numbered unrecorded User
Song (Song numbers 103–107) available
for recording is displayed. If you want to
select the Song you will be recording,
select the desired Song number by using
the [+] and [-] buttons.
Flashes
• Accompaniment cannot be
turned on or off once the
[REC] button is pressed.
NOTE
• A total of approximately
10,000 notes or 5,500 chord
changes can be recorded to
the five User Songs.
NOTE
36 48
7260
Split Point
Record Your Own Performance
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
37
3
Stop recording.
Pressing the [START/STOP] button stops recording and writes the data to the
User Song. (A “Writing!” message is shown.)
To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button.
The User Songs are organized into two tracks: Track 1 and Track 2. You can specify the track you want to record
to.
About track recording
If you start recording by specifying a track, the track will be overwritten (existing
data in the track is deleted and replaced with the new recording).
Only your keyboard performance can be recorded to Track 1. Either a Style or your
performance can be recorded to Track 2, resulting in a User Song like that depicted
below.
• Never attempt to turn the
power off when a “Writ-
ing!” message is shown in
the display. Doing so can
damage the flash memory
device and result in a loss
of data.
• Use the Musicsoft Down-
loader to backup the User
Songs to a computer (page
45).
NOTICE
NOTE
In order to record with the Style, turn auto accompaniment to on (see Step 2
on page 19), and then record according to the instructions.
In order to record only your performance, turn auto accompaniment to off
and record according to the normal steps.
(The “ACMP ON” lights.)
(The “ACMP ON” is unlit.)
Recording to a Specific track
• Record following the steps
in the previous page, and
your performance will be
recorded to Track 1 and the
Style (if you are playing one)
will be recorded to Track 2.
NOTE
User Song
Data that can be
recorded to Track 2
Data that can be
recorded to Track 1
Style playback* (including
chord changes) or your own
keyboard performance
* When playing
the Style
Recording to the specified track
Your own keyboard
performance only
• You cannot record the
Reverb Level, metronome
click, or the Transpose and
Tuning settings.
• The following settings and
buttons cannot be changed,
or if changed, the new set-
tings cannot be recorded if
entered during the recording
process.
ACMP ON/OFF, Split Point,
Reverb Type, Chorus Type,
Harmony Type, [FUNC-
TION] button, [PORTABLE
GRAND] button.
NOTE
User Song
Track 2 Track 1
Style
Yo u r o w n
keyboard
performance
User Song
Track 2 Track 1
Yo u r o w n
keyboard
performance
Yo u r o w n
keyboard
performance
Record Your Own Performance
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
38
Selecting a specific track for recording
1
Turn ACMP (auto accompaniment) on or off, depending on what
you want to record.
If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on. If you want to record only
your own keyboard performance, turn ACMP off.
2
Specify the track you want to record.
Specify Track 2 when you want to record the Style.
When you want to record your own keyboard performance, you can specify
either track.
Recording to Track 1
While holding the [REC] button, press the [REC TRACK 1] button.
Recording to Track 2
While holding the [REC] button, press the [REC TRACK 2] button.
3
Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to
record.
If you want to record Style playback to Track 2, press the [STYLE] button and
select the desired Style.
4
Start recording
Perform steps 2 and 3 on pages 36–37.
By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when auto accompaniment is set to
on, the Style starts sounding and is recorded. Only your performance is recorded
by playing the keyboard (any key is OK) when auto accompaniment is set to off.
• Keep in mind that both
Tracks 1 and 2 will be over-
written with new data if you
record without specifying
the tracks.
• The both “L” and “R”
flashes, this indicates that
you have specified Track 1
when auto accompaniment
is on. If you want to record
your own performance,
press the [TRACK 2] button
to stop the “L” flashing. If you
want to record a Style, press
the [REC] button to cancel
the recording, and repeat
the procedure from the
beginning.
NOTE
User 1
rEC
001
Press simultaneously
Flashes when Track 1 is
selected for recording.
User 1
rEC
001
Press simultaneously
Flashes when
track 2 is selected
for recording.
Lights when recorded data exists.
Turns off when there is no
recorded data, or when Mute
is set to on (page 34) to turn off
playback of the track.
If you want to record only the
rhythm (percussion) part,
press the [START/STOP]
button to play just the
rhythm, then add the section
change by pressing the
[INTO/ENDING/rit.] button or
[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.
• You can record a new track
while listening to a previ-
ously recorded track (the
track indication will appear).
You can also mute recorded
tracks (the track will disap-
pear) while recording a new
track by pressing the
desired track button.
NOTE
User 3
rEC
Record Your Own Performance
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
39
Deleting an entire User Song.
1
Press the [SONG] button and select the User Song you want to
delete by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
2
Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second.
The Song Delete display appears.
You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] button.
3
Press the [+/YES] button.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] button.
4
Press the [+/YES] button to delete the Song.
“Writing!” message will appear while the track is being deleted.
Deleting User Songs
• You cannot delete a specific
track from a User Song.
NOTE
User 1
103
ClrUser1
YES
Hold for longer
than a second.
Sure?
YES
Writing!
000
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
40
Backup and Initialization
The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off.
If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation “Initialization” as explained below.
This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The
following initialization procedures are provided.
Initialization
To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory turn the power on by pressing
the [ ] (Standby/On) switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard.
The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored.
Initialization does not delete the files transferred from the computer. If you want to
delete the files, see “Deleting Files” below.
Deleting Files
To clear song and style files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory
from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [ ] (Standby/On) switch while
simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest
black keys.
Backup
• You can save the settings as
backup data to your com-
puter, by using the Musicsoft
Downloader (MSD) soft-
ware. Refer to the section
“Transferring data between
the instrument and a com-
puter” on page 45.
NOTE
Backup parameters
User Songs
Style Number 107
Touch Response on/off
Passing status of Song and Step
FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume,
Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Your Tempo, Demo
Group, Demo Play Mode, Demo Cancel, Master EQ
type, Panel Sustain, Auto Power Off
Initialization
• When you execute the Ini-
tialization, backup parame-
ters will be cleared.
NOTICE
• When you delete the files,
Song data and Style data
you have purchased and
downloaded will also be
cleared. Make sure to save
your important data by
transferring to a computer
using Musicsoft Down-
loader (page 45).
NOTICE
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
41
Function Settings
The [FUNCTION] button gives you access to a variety of operations related to adjusting
or enhancing the sound and making settings for connection to external devices.
For more about the available functions, see the following Function Setting List.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the
desired item appears.
Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, the Function number increases
one by one.
You can also decrease the Function number by one when you press the [-] but-
ton briefly while holding down the [FUNCTION] button.
If the Function includes sub-modes, the Function item appears in the display for
a few seconds, and the sub-modes will be displayed.
2
Set the value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Function Setting List
Select the item and change the value
• The Function number will
not appear in the display
during Song, Style or metro-
nome playback. The mea-
sure will appear instead.
NOTE
001
StyleVol
100
Value Function item
Function number
• Some Function settings are
stored in memory as soon as
they are changed. See “The
Backup Parameterson
page 40 for information on
the Function settings that
are stored on the instrument.
• To exit the Function settings,
press one of these buttons;
[SONG], [VOICE],[STYLE]
or [GRAND PIANO].
NOTE
Direct numeric entry.
• Decrement value by 1.
• No
• Off
• Increment value by 1.
• Yes
• On
Press simultaneously to
recall the default setting.
No. Item Display
Range/
settings
Default
setting
Description
Volume
001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Style.
002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Song.
Overall
003 Transpose Transpos -12–00–12 00
Determines the pitch of the instrument in semitone increments.
NOTE: The pitch of the Drum Kits Voices cannot be changed.
004 Tuning Tuning
427.0–453.0
(Hz)
440.0 (Hz)
Determines the fine tuning of the pitch of the entire instrument
in approx. 0.2Hz increments.
NOTE: The pitch of the Drum Kits Voices cannot be changed.
005 Split Point SplitPnt
000–127
(C-2–G8)
54 (F#2)
Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split
“point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower)
and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompani-
ment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value.
006 Touch Sensitivity TouchSns
1 Soft
2 Medium
3 Hard
2 Medium
When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of
the feature. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume
variation in response to keyboard dynamics.
Function Settings
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
42
Style File
007 Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn
Select and register a Style file from flash files that are loaded
from computer (page 46).
Main Voice
008 Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 *
Determines the volume of the Main Voice to adjust the balance
between Song playback and the notes you play on the key-
board.
009 Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–0–2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.
010
Main Voice Chorus
Send Level
M.Chorus 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Dual Voice
011 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–497 * Selects the Dual Voice.
012 Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 0–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.
013 Dual Voice Octave D.Octave -2–0–2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.
014
Dual Voice Chorus
Send Level
D.Chorus 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Split Voice
015 Split Voice S.Voice 001–497 * Selects the Split Voice.
016 Split Voice Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice.
017 Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–0–2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice.
018
Split Voice Chorus
Send Level
S.Chorus 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Effect
019 Reverb Type Reverb 0110 **
Determines the Reverb type, including off (10).
Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 67.
020 Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 64
Determines how much of the Voices signal is sent to the
Reverb effect.
021 Chorus Type Chorus 1–5 **
Determines the Chorus type, including off (05).
Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 67.
022 Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF OFF
Determines whether or not Panel Sustain is always applied to
the Main/Dual/Split Voices. Panel Sustain is applied continu-
ously when ON, or not applied when OFF.
023 Master EQ Type MasterEQ
1 Speaker
2 Flat
1 Speaker
Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum
sound in different listening situations.
Speaker: For listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers.
Flat: For headphones, or for listening via external speakers.
024 Wide Type Wide 1–3 2
Determines the Ultra-Wide Stereo type.
Higher values produce a greater Wide effect.
Harmony
025 Harmony Type HarmType 01– 26 *
Determines the Harmony type.
Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 67.
026 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 *
Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when one of the
Harmony types 1–5 is selected.
MIDI
027 PC Mode PC mode OFF/PC1/PC2 OFF
Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer
(page 43).
028 Local On/Off Local ON/OFF ON
Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the
internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF).
On
Both the notes played on the instrument’s keyboard and data
received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will be played by
the internal tone generator.
Off
With this setting, the instrument itself produces no sound, but
the performance data is transmitted via the MIDI terminal.
Data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will also be
played by the internal tone generator.
029 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF
Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the inter-
nal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON).
No. Item Display
Range/
settings
Default
setting
Description
Function Settings
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
43
* Different for each voice combination.
** Different for each Song or Style combination.
PC Mode (FUNCTION 027)
The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below).
* Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during Song playback.
** Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during Style playback.
*** Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).
030 Initial Setup Send InitSend YES/NO
Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer.
Use the [+] button to transmit the data.
Metronome
031
Time Signature
Numerator
TimeSigN 00–60 **
Determines the time signature of the Metronome.
A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the
other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at
the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”.
032
Time Signature
Denominator
TimeSigD
Half note,
Quarter note,
Eighth note,
Sixteenth note
** Sets the length of each metronome beat.
033 Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome.
Lesson
034 Lesson Track (R) R-Part 0116 01
Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson.
The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 trans-
ferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Transferred
Songs for Lessons” on page 46.
035 Lesson Track (L) L-Part 0116 02
Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson.
The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 trans-
ferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Transferred
Songs for Lessons” on page 46.
036 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON
Determines whether the song playback tempo matches the
speed at which you are playing (ON) or not (OFF), when using
the “Waiting” Lesson mode.
Demo
037 Demo Group DemoGrp
1 DEMO
2 Preset
3 User
4 Download
1 DEMO Determines the repeat playback group.
038 Demo Play Mode PlayMode
1 Normal
2 Random
1 Normal Determines the repeat playback mode.
039 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF OFF
Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this
is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/
BGM] button is pressed.
Power Save
040 Auto Power Off AutoOff
OFF/5/10/15/
30/60/120
(minutes)
30
Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s
power is automatically turned off.
No. Item Display
Range/
settings
Default
setting
Description
• Song Out, Style Out and Key-
board Out can only be
changed by the PC setting.
They cannot be set indepen-
dently. Song Out can be used
with User Songs.
NOTE
PC1 PC2 OFF
LOCAL Off Off On
EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off
SONG OUT* Off Off On
STYLE OUT** Off Off On
KEYBOARD OUT*** Off On On
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
44
Connecting to a Computer
This instrument can be connected to a computer to allow transfer of MIDI data or a file.
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a world-standard interface for communi-
cation between electronic musical instruments and music devices.
MIDI settings such as Local Control are made in the Function settings (page 42 Func-
tion 027–030).
1
Turn off the power of the instrument before connecting a USB cable.
2
Turn on the power of the computer.
Quit any open application software on the computer.
3
Connect the instrument and the computer via a USB cable.
4
Turn on the power of the instrument.
When you connect the instrument to a computer for the first time, the driver is installed automatically.
Operating System (OS)
Windows XP (SP3 or later)/Windows Vista *Only 32-bit, Windows 7, Mac OS X Version 10.5.0–10.6.x
When data communication is unstable or some problem occurs even though you’ve executed the above
instructions, download the Yamaha Standard USBMIDI driver from the following URL then install it to your
computer. For instructions on installation, refer to the Install Guide included in the package file.
http://download.yamaha.com/
For details about OS for Yamaha Standard USB-MIDI driver, visit the URL above.
Precautions when using the USB terminal
When connecting the computer to the USB terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so
risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the
application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again.
Connecting a Personal Computer
USB cable
USB terminal
Instrument
USB terminal
NOTICE
• Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used.
• Before connecting the computer to the USB terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspend, sleep,
standby).
• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB terminal.
Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB terminal.
Quit any open application software on the computer.
• Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or
playing back a song.)
• While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turn-
ing the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.
Connecting to a Computer
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
45
This instrument includes 102 preset Songs and 106 Styles, but you can load other Songs and Styles from your
computer and use them in the same way as the preset Songs and Styles as long as the loaded Song is SMF format
0* or the loaded Style is SFF (Style File Format). Loaded Song data will be stored to Song numbers beginning
with 108 and one of the loaded Style/s can be registered as the 107th Style. In order to perform the operations
described in this section you will need to use a computer connected to the Internet to download the free Musicsoft
Downloader application.
* The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing
sequence data. Most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0.
Installing Musicsoft Downloader
You can download the “Musicsoft Downloader” application from the following web-
site. Make sure that your computer has an Internet connection.
http://download.yamaha.com/
Please visit the URL above to get the information on the computer system require-
ments for Musicsoft Downloader.
Transferring Data by using the Musicsoft Downloader
You can transmit Song files and Style Files from your computer to the Flash Mem-
ory on your instrument by Musicsoft Downloader.
You can also transfer backup data (page 40) other than the “Passing status of Song
and Step” to a computer as a backup file.
For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions see the Help menu: launch the
Musicsoft Downloader application and click “Help.
Transferring data between the instrument and a computer
• Visit the Yamaha website for
more information on the latest
version of Musicsoft Down-
loader (version 5.6.1 or
higher) and how to install it.
NOTE
• The Musicsoft Downloader
application may not be able
to access the instrument in
the following cases:
• During Style playback
• During Song playback
• Use the power adaptor
when transferring data.
The data can be corrupted
if the batteries fail during
the transfer.
• Never turn the power off
and never plug/unplug the
AC power adaptor during
data transmission. Not
only will the data fail to be
transferred and saved, but
operation of the flash
memory may become
unstable and its contents
may disappear completely
when the power is turned
on or off.
• Close the window to exit from
the Musicsoft Downloader
and re-enable control of the
instrument.
NOTE
NOTICE
NOTE
Data that can be loaded to this instrument from a computer
Songs : 256 Songs max (Song numbers 108–)
Data : Approx. 1.7MB
Data Format : SMF Format 0 and 1
File : 11PK3.BUP (Backup file)
***.mid (MIDI Song)
***.sty (Style File)
Musicsoft Downloader Operations
Move the file from the computer to “Flash Memory” under “Electronic Musical
Instruments.
Connecting to a Computer
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
46
This instrument features 106 internal Styles, but other Styles, such as those which can be obtained from the inter-
net (only Styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be registered to Style number 107 and used in the same way as the
internal Styles.
In order to use the Style File register function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to the
instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page 45
(“Transferring data between the instrument and a computer”). The procedure described below registers a Style file
that has already been transferred from a computer to the instrument to Style number 107.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button as many times as neces-
sary to select the Style File Load function “StyleReg”
(Function 007).
After about 2 seconds the name of a registerable Style file will appear in the dis-
play. If multiple loadable Style files have been transferred to the instrument, you
can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in sequence.
2
Execute the register operation.
With the name of the Style file you want to register shown in the dis-
play, press the number [0] button.
3
A confirmation message for the register operation will
appear. Press the [+/YES] button to actually register the file.
• Preset Song data cannot be
transmitted from this instru-
ment
• “Passing status of Song and
Step” cannot be transferred
from this instrument as a
“backup file.
The backup data, including
the five User Songs is
transmitted/received as a
single file. As a result, all
backup data (including the
five Songs) will be over-
written every time you
transmit or receive. Keep
this in mind when transfer-
ring data.
• Do not rename the backup
file on the computer. If you
do so, it will not be recog-
nized when transferred to
the instrument.
NOTE
NOTICE
Data that can be transferred to a computer from this instrument
Backup file (11PK3.BUP: backup data containing five User Songs)
Songs transferred from a computer
Musicsoft Downloader Operations
Move the file from “System Drive” under “Electronic Musical Instruments” to
the computer.
Erasing Transferred Song Data from Internal Memory
To erase all Songs transferred from the computer, use the “Deleting Files” func-
tion on page 40. To erase specific Songs transferred from the computer, use the
Delete function on Musicsoft Downloader.
Using Transferred Songs for Lessons
In order to use Songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for les-
sons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-
hand and left-hand parts. Refer to the “Lesson Track (R)” or “Lesson Track (L)”
in the Function Setting List on page 43. The procedure for setting the guide track
is as follows: Select a transferred Song you want to use for lessons. Press the
[FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “R-Part” or “L-Part” appears
in the display, and then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the
channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. We rec-
ommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the
left-hand part.
Registering Style Files
StyleReg
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
47
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping
sound is temporarily produced.
This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power.
When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce inter-
ference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from
the instrument.
There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or
when a song or style is being played back.
Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear
panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output.
Check the Local Control on/off setting. (See page 42 Function 028.)
Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems
to be cut off.
The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes — including Dual
voice, Split Voice, auto accompaniment, song, and Metronome.
Notes exceeding this limit will not sound.
Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does
not produce any sound.
When using the Dictionary function (page 22), the keys in the right hand area
are used only for entering the chord root and type.
The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/
STOP] button is pressed.
Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to
“Function Settings” on page 42 (Function 029).
The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the
[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.
Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any Style-
related function.
The Style does not sound properly.
Make sure that the Style Volume (page 41 Function 001) is set to an appropri-
ate level.
Is the Split Point set to an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set
the Split Point to an appropriate key (page 41 Function 005).
Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing, press
the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.
The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords
are played in sequence (e.g., some minor chords followed by the minor sev-
enth).
Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played
chord.
Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompani-
ment based only on the root.
The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the oppo-
site effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off
the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.
The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is
properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.
The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings
(samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual
sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.
The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the
selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it
by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then
play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types
06–26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is nec-
essary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12.
The volume is too soft.
The sound quality is poor.
The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play.
The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-
rectly.
The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel
settings are reset.
The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new
ones, or use the optional AC adaptor.
Power suddenly and unexpectedly turns off. This is normal and the Auto Power Off function may have been activated
(page 9). If you need to disable the Auto Power Off function, select “Off” in the
Function settings (page 43 Function 040).
Appendix
48
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Song Book Sample
This score is provided with the part of the song book (free downloadable scores).
The song book contains not only the scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3) but also music terms and impor-
tant points for your practice. To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website.
* The Song book is provided in English, French, German and Spanish.
This example introduces part of the English song book.
Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
Für Elise
Für Elise is an all-time classical favorite.
The beautiful, well-known melody is repeated a number of times.
In each step you won’t be practicing alone. You have a wonderful orchestra to back you up!
First, listen to the example a few times. It won’t be long before you’ll want to start playing it yourself!
Für Elise With Step Map
.......................................................................12
Song No.004
Basic
Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” ....................................14
Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 15
Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment” .....................................16
Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 16
First Half Review ...................................................................... 17
Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 17
Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” .................................... 18
“EEEEE!” ................................................................................ 18
“Left! Right! Left! Right!” ............................................................ 19
Second Half Review ................................................................... 19
Play the Whole Song! ................................................................. 19
L. v. Beethoven
49
Song Book Sample
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Before Playing...
Sit Correctly Finger Numbering
Left Right
3
1
1
5
3
4
4
5
2
2
Sit near the middle of the keyboard.
Reading the Score
The Keyboard, Staff Lines, and Clef
BDEFGACBDEFGA BDCEFGAC BDEFGACBDEFGACC
M
i
d
d
l
e
Treble clef
Bass clef
Time Signatures and Counting Time
4/4 time 2/2 time 2/4 time
3/4 time 6/8 time 9/8 time
1 octave
2 black keys 3 black keys
Accidentals
(Sharp) Raise a semitone
B
(Flat) Lower a semitone
N
(Natural) Return to normal pitch
Key signature
Clef
Time signature
Notes and Rests
Whole note
Dotted half note
Half note
Dotted quarter note
Quarter note
Eighth note
Sixteenth note
Whole note rest
Dotted half note rest
Half note rest
Dotted quarter note rest
Quarter note rest
Eighth note rest
Sixteenth note rest


1234
50
Song Book Sample
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004
Play with both hands as if gently telling a story. It might help to sing or hum the melody as you play.
Similar melody lines and rhythms are repeated in this song, so there aren’t as many sections to practice as
you might think. Enjoy learning each section as you build proficiency.
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
With Step Map
From here...
51
Song Book Sample
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
...to here From here...
...to here
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
52
Song Book Sample
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery”
Let’s start with a warm-up exercise using three fingers of the right hand.
We’ll start by ascending and descending the white and black keys. Check out the
illustrations until you understand how the fingers are supposed to move, then get
started!
You’ll find it easier to play if you bend your fingers slightly.
F
i
n
g
e
r
s
u
s
e
d
f
o
r
t
h
i
s
e
x
e
r
c
i
s
e
Right
Tip-toe
ABCD
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
E
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
A E
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
Go back to the beginning and play it again.
53
Song Book Sample
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Diligent Practice Time
Right! Now that we’re warmed up let’s try playing along with the orchestra in 3/4 time.
The melody will be built up little by little.
Compare each line... notice that many of the shapes formed by the notes are very similar.
Short break
Almost done
E
54
Song Book Sample
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment”
And now a warm-up exercise for the left hand.
It’s important to spread your fingers widely from the start.
Don’t play the black keys too strongly.
Left hand
AEAE
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
Diligent Practice Time
Connect the notes smoothly, as if the left hand were passing them to the right hand. You’ll be able to play
smoothly if you move the left hand into position for the next phrase as soon as it finishes playing the first
phrase.
55
Song Book Sample
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Diligent Practice Time
OK, let’s begin the second half!
You’ll be able to play the melody nicely if you lift your fingers from the keyboard between the slurs.
It might be easier to grasp the key release timing if you sing along with the melody.
Don’t panic and play too strongly where the left hand has to play short notes.
First Half Review
You’ve reached the halfway step! Have you learned all the material provided in the preceding steps?
Now let’s go back and play through all the first-half exercises. If you find that you’re having trouble
playing any of the material, go back and review the steps using the Step Map as a guide.
Always have left-hand finger 5 ready to play the next note!
56
Song Book Sample
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
EEE
Jump to the
next E!
And again!
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition”
The first note has a staccato dot.
Spread your fingers wide and jump quickly to the next note!
Left hand
“EEEEE!”
The only note in this step is E!
Make the connection between the left and right hands as smooth as possible.
Y
o
u
c
a
n
p
l
a
y
t
h
i
s
w
i
t
h
o
n
l
y
t
h
e
s
e
f
i
n
g
e
r
s
!
57
Song Book Sample
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Left
Right
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
“Left! Right! Left! Right!”
Play “D
E” repeatedly, alternating the left and right hands.
Have the next hand ready in position to play D
so you won’t have to rush.
Second Half Review
Try playing all the way through the second half.
As we did after the first half, if there are places you can’t play with confidence go back and review the steps.
Play the Whole Song!
This is the finishing step!
Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. Just concentrate on playing the entire song from start to finish.
Practice this with the lessons learned in each step in mind, and gradually you’ll master the whole song.
58
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Voice List
Panel Voice List
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
PIANO
1 0 112 1 Grand Piano
2 0 112 2 Bright Piano
3 0 112 7 Harpsichord
4 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano
5 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano
601133CP 80
E.PIANO
7 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano
8 0 113 6 Hyper Tines
9 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano
10 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano
11 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano
12 0 112 8 Clavi
ORGAN
13 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1
14 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2
15 0 112 19 Rock Organ
16 0 114 19 Purple Organ
17 0 112 18 Click Organ
18 0 116 17 Bright Organ
19 0 127 19 Theater Organ
20 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ
21 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ
22 0 113 20 Chapel Organ
23 0 112 20 Pipe Organ
24 0 112 21 Reed Organ
ACCORDION
25 0 112 22 Musette Accordion
26 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion
27 0 113 24 Bandoneon
28 0 112 23 Harmonica
GUITAR
29 0 112 25 Classical Guitar
30 0 112 26 Folk Guitar
31 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar
32 0 117 28 60’s Clean Guitar
33 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar
34 0 112 28 Clean Guitar
35 0 113 27 Octave Guitar
36 0 112 29 Muted Guitar
37 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar
38 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar
BASS
39 0 112 34 Finger Bass
40 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass
41 0 112 35 Pick Bass
42 0 112 36 Fretless Bass
43 0 112 37 Slap Bass
44 0 112 39 Synth Bass
45 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass
46 0 113 40 Dance Bass
STRINGS
47 0 112 49 String Ensemble
48 0 112 50 Chamber Strings
49 0 113 50 Slow Strings
50 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings
51 0 112 51 Synth Strings
52 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings
53 0 112 41 Violin
54 0 112 43 Cello
55 0 112 44 Contrabass
56 0 112 47 Harp
57 0 112 106 Banjo
58 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit
CHOIR
59 0 112 53 Choir
60 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble
61 0 112 55 Air Choir
62 0 112 54 Vox Humana
SAXOPHONE
63 0 112 67 Tenor Sax
64 0 112 66 Alto Sax
65 0 112 65 Soprano Sax
66 0 112 68 Baritone Sax
67 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax
68 0 112 72 Clarinet
69 0 112 69 Oboe
70 0 112 70 English Horn
71 0 112 71 Bassoon
TRUMPET
72 0 112 57 Trumpet
73 0 112 58 Trombone
74 0 113 58 Trombone Section
75 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet
76 0 112 61 French Horn
77 0 112 59 Tuba
BRASS
78 0 112 62 Brass Section
79 0 113 62 Big Band Brass
80 0 113 63 80’s Brass
81 0 119 62 Mellow Horns
82 0 114 63 Techno Brass
83 0 112 63 Synth Brass
FLUTE
84 0 112 74 Flute
85 0 112 73 Piccolo
86 0 112 76 Pan Flute
87 0 112 75 Recorder
88 0 112 80 Ocarina
SYNTH
89 0 112 81 Square Lead
90 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead
91 0 115 82 Analogon
92 0 119 82 Fargo
93 0 112 99 Star Dust
94 0 112 86 Voice Lead
95 0 112 101 Brightness
96 0 112 92 Xenon Pad
97 0 112 95 Equinox
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Nam e
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Maximum Polyphony
The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This
means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once,
regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment
uses a number of the available notes, so when auto
accompaniment is used the total number of available notes
for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The
same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the
maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will
be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note
priority).
• The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each
voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the
instrument via MIDI from an external device.
• Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program
Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Pro-
gram Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take
this into consideration.
• Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after
the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch)
is held.
NOTE
59
Voice List
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
* When you select a Voice of the DUAL category, two voices
sound at the same time. The Voice whose MIDI program
change number is indicated in the Voice List is known as the
Main Voice.
XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List
98 0 112 89 Fantasia
99 0 113 90 Dark Moon
100 0 113 101 Bell Pad
PERCUSSION
101 0 112 12 Vibraphone
102 0 112 13 Marimba
103 0 112 14 Xylophone
104 0 112 115 Steel Drums
105 0 112 9 Celesta
106 0 112 11 Music Box
107 0 112 15 Tubular Bells
108 0 112 48 Timpani
WORLD
109 0 115 111 Er Hu
110 0 117 74 Di Zi
111 0 116 106 P i Pa
112 0 0 105 S itar
113 0 0 16 Dulcimer
114 0 98 106 Oud
115 0 0 107 Shamisen
116 0 113 108 GuZheng
117 0 0 108 Koto
118 0 0 109 K a limba
119 0 0 110 Bagpipe
120 0 0 111 Fiddle
121 0 0 112 Shanai
122 126 0 128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc.
DUAL*
123 0 112 1 Octave Piano
124 0 112 1 Piano + Strings
125 0 112 1 Piano Pad
126 0 0 6 E.P. Pad
127 0 0 49 Octave Strings
128 0 0 62 Octave Brass
129 0 0 49 Orchestra Tutti
130 0 0 53 Octave Choir
131 0 0 62 Jazz Section
132 0 0 74 Flute & Clarinet
SOUND EFFECTS
1330 0121Fret Noise
1340 0122Breath Noise
135 0 0 123 Seashore
1360 0124Bird Tweet
137 0 0 125 Telephone Ring
138 0 0 126 Helicopter
139 0 0 127 Applause
140 0 0 128 Gunshot
DRUM KITS
141 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1
142 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2
143 127 0 9 Room Kit
144 127 0 17 Rock Kit
145 127 0 25 Electronic Kit
146 127 0 26 Analog Kit
147 127 0 113 Dance Kit
148 127 0 33 Jazz Kit
149 127 0 41 Brush Kit
150 127 0 49 Symphony Kit
151 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1
152 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2
153 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Nam e
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
XG PIANO
154 0 0 1 Grand Piano
155 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP
156 0 40 1 Piano Strings
157 0 41 1 Dream
158 0 0 2 Bright Piano
159 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP
160 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano
161 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP
162 0 32 3 Detuned CP80
163 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano
164 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP
165 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1
166 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP
167 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1
168 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2
169 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP
*170 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2
171 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano
172 0 0 7 Harpsichord
173 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP
174 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2
175 0 0 8 Clavi
176 0 1 8 Clavi KSP
XG CHROMATIC
177 0 0 9 Celesta
178 0 0 10 Glockenspiel
179 0 0 11 Music Box
180 0 64 11 Orgel
181 0 0 12 Vibraphone
182 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP
183 0 0 13 Marimba
184 0 1 13 Marimba KSP
185 0 64 13 Sine Marimba
186 0 97 13 Balimba
187 0 98 13 Log Drums
188 0 0 14 Xylophone
189 0 0 15 Tubular Bells
190 0 96 15 Church Bells
191 0 97 15 Carillon
192 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2
193 0 96 16 Cimbalom
194 0 97 16 Santur
XG ORGAN
195 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ
196 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ
197 0 33 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 1
198 0 34 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 2
199 0 35 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 1
200 0 37 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 3
201 0 40 17 16+2'2/3
202 0 64 17 Organ Bass
203 0 65 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 2
204 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ
205 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2
206 0 0 18 Percussive Organ
207 0 24 18 70’s Percussive Organ
208 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ
209 0 33 18 Light Organ
210 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2
211 0 0 19 Rock Organ
212 0 64 19 Rotary Organ
213 0 65 19 Slow Rotary
214 0 66 19 Fast Rotary
215 0 0 20 Church Organ
216 0 32 20 Church Organ 3
217 0 35 20 Church Organ 2
218 0 40 20 Notre Dame
219 0 64 20 Organ Flute
220 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute
221 0 0 21 Reed Organ
60
Voice List
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
222 0 40 21 Puff Organ
223 0 0 22 Accordion
224 0 0 23 Harmonica
225 0 32 23 Harmonica 2
226 0 0 24 Tango Accordion
227 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2
XG GUITAR
228 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar
229 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics
230 0 96 25 Ukulele
231 0 0 26 Steel Guitar
232 0 35 26 12-string Guitar
233 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar
234 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound
235 0 96 26 Mandolin
236 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar
237 0 32 27 Jazz Amp
238 0 0 28 Clean Guitar
239 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar
240 0 0 29 Muted Guitar
241 0 40 29 Funk Guitar
242 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar
243 0 45 29 Jazz Man
244 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar
245 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch
246 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar
247 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar
248 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2
249 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics
250 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback
251 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2
XG BASS
252 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass
253 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm
254 0 45 33
Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass
255 0 0 34 Finger Bass
256 0 18 34 Finger Dark
257 0 40 34
Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar
258 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass
259 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2
260 0 65 34 Modulated Bass
261 0 0 35 Pick Bass
262 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass
263 0 0 36 Fretless Bass
264 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2
265 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3
266 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4
267 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1
268 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass
269 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2
270 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap
271 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1
272 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass
273 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2
274 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass
275 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass
276 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass
277 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark
*278 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass
279 0 41 40 DX Bass
XG STRINGS
280 0 0 41 Violin
281 0 8 41 Slow Violin
282 0 0 42 Viola
283 0 0 43 Cello
284 0 0 44 Contrabass
285 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings
286 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings
287 0 40 45 Suspense Strings
288 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings
289 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp
290 0 40 47 Yang Chin
291 0 0 48 Timpani
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
XG ENSEMBLE
292 0 0 49 Strings 1
293 0 3 49 Stereo Strings
294 0 8 49 Slow Strings
295 0 35 49 60’s Strings
296 0 40 49 Orchestra
297 0 41 49 Orchestra 2
298 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra
299 0 45 49 Velocity Strings
300 0 0 50 Strings 2
301 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings
302 0 8 50 Legato Strings
303 0 40 50 Warm Strings
304 0 41 50 Kingdom
305 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1
306 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2
307 0 0 53 Choir Aahs
308 0 3 53 Stereo Choir
309 0 32 53 Mellow Choir
310 0 40 53 Choir Strings
311 0 0 54 Voice Oohs
312 0 0 55 Synth Voice
313 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2
314 0 41 55 Choral
315 0 64 55 Analog Voice
316 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit
317 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2
318 0 64 56 Impact
XG BRASS
319 0 0 57 Trumpet
320 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet
321 0 0 58 Trombone
322 0 18 58 Trombone 2
323 0 0 59 Tuba
324 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet
325 0 0 61 French Horn
326 0 6 61 French Horn Solo
327 0 32 61 French Horn 2
328 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra
329 0 0 62 Brass Section
330 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section
331 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1
332 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass
333 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2
334 0 18 64 Soft Brass
335 0 41 64 Choir Brass
XG REED
336 0 0 65 Soprano Sax
337 0 0 66 Alto Sax
338 0 40 66 Sax Section
339 0 0 67 Tenor Sax
340 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax
341 0 0 68 Baritone Sax
342 0 0 69 Oboe
343 0 0 70 English Horn
344 0 0 71 Bassoon
345 0 0 72 Clarinet
XG PIPE
346 0 0 73 Piccolo
347 0 0 74 Flute
348 0 0 75 Recorder
349 0 0 76 Pan Flute
350 0 0 77 Blown Bottle
351 0 0 78 Shakuhachi
352 0 0 79 Whistle
353 0 0 80 Ocarina
XG SYNTH LEAD
354 0 0 81 Square Lead
355 0 6 81 Square Lead 2
356 0 8 81 LM Square
357 0 18 81 Hollow
358 0 19 81 Shroud
359 0 64 81 Mellow
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Nam e
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
61
Voice List
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional
voice.
360 0 65 81 Solo Sine
361 0 66 81 Sine Lead
362 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead
363 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2
364 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth
365 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth
366 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth
367 0 20 82 Big Lead
368 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog
369 0 0 83 Calliope Lead
370 0 65 83 Pure Lead
371 0 0 84 Chiff Lead
372 0 0 85 Charang Lead
373 0 64 85 Distorted Lead
374 0 0 86 Voice Lead
375 0 0 87 Fifths Lead
376 0 35 87 Big Five
377 0 0 88 Bass & Lead
378 0 16 88 Big & Low
379 0 64 88 Fat & Perky
380 0 65 88 Soft Whirl
XG SYNTH PAD
381 0 0 89 New Age Pad
382 0 64 89 Fantasy
383 0 0 90 Warm Pad
384 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad
385 0 0 92 Choir Pad
386 0 66 92 Itopia
387 0 0 93 Bowed Pad
388 0 0 94 Metallic Pad
389 0 0 95 Halo Pad
390 0 0 96 Sweep Pad
XG SYNTH EFFECTS
391 0 0 97 Rain
392 0 65 97 African Wind
393 0 66 97 Carib
394 0 0 98 Sound Track
395 0 27 98 Prologue
396 0 0 99 Crystal
397 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp
398 0 14 99 Popcorn
399 0 18 99 Tiny Bells
400 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel
401 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes
402 0 41 99 Clear Bells
403 0 42 99 Chorus Bells
404 0 65 99 Soft Crystal
405 0 70 99 Air Bells
406 0 71 99 Bell Harp
407 0 72 99 Gamelimba
408 0 0 100 Atmosphere
409 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere
410 0 19 100 Hollow Release
411 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano
412 0 64 100 Nylon Harp
413 0 65 100 Harp Vox
414 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad
415 0 0 101 Brightness
4160 0102Goblins
417 0 64 102 Goblins Synth
418 0 65 102 Creeper
419 0 67 102 Ritual
420 0 68 102 To Heaven
421 0 70 102 Night
422 0 71 102 Glisten
423 0 96 102 Bell Choir
424 0 0 103 Echoes
425 0 0 104 Sci-Fi
XG WORLD
426 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar
427 0 35 105 Sitar 2
428 0 97 105 Tamboura
429 0 0 106 Banjo
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
430 0 28 106 Muted Banjo
431 0 96 106 Rabab
432 0 97 106 Gopichant
433 0 96 108 Taisho-kin
434 0 97 108 Kanoon
XG PERCUSSIVE
435 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell
436 0 96 113 Bonang
437 0 97 113 Altair
438 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs
439 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs
440 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal
441 0 0 114 Agogo
442 0 0 115 Steel Drums
443 0 97 115 Glass Percussion
444 0 98 115 Thai Bells
445 0 0 116 Woodblock
446 0 96 116 Castanets
447 0 0 117 Taiko Drum
448 0 96 117 Gran Cassa
449 0 0 118 Melodic Tom
450 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2
451 0 65 118 Real Tom
452 0 66 118 Rock Tom
453 0 0 119 Synth Drum
454 0 64 119 Analog Tom
455 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion
456 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal
XG SOUND EFFECTS
457 64 0 1 Cutting Noise
458 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2
459 64 0 4 String Slap
460 64 0 17 Flute Key Click
461 64 0 33 Shower
462 64 0 34 Thunder
463 64 0 35 Wind
464 64 0 36 Stream
465 64 0 37 Bubble
466 64 0 38 Feed
467 64 0 49 Dog
468 64 0 50 Horse
469 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2
470 64 0 56 Maou
471 64 0 65 Phone Call
472 64 0 66 Door Squeak
473 64 0 67 Door Slam
474 64 0 68 Scratch Cut
475 64 0 69 Scratch Split
476 64 0 70 Wind Chime
477 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2
478 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition
479 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal
480 64 0 83 Car Passing
481 64 0 84 Car Crash
482 64 0 85 Siren
483 64 0 86 Train
484 64 0 87 Jet Plane
485 64 0 88 Starship
486 64 0 89 Burst
487 64 0 90 Roller Coaster
488 64 0 91 Submarine
489 64 0 97 Laugh
490 64 0 98 Scream
491 64 0 99 Punch
492 64 0 100 Heartbeat
493 64 0 101 Footsteps
494 64 0 113 Machine Gun
495 64 0 114 Laser Gun
496 64 0 115 Explosion
497 64 0 116 Firework
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Nam e
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
62
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Drum Kit List
• “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.
• Each percussion voice uses one note.
• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “141: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H”
(Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).
• Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.
• Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.)
Voice No. 141 142 143 144 145 146
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026
Keyboard MIDI
Key
Off
Alternate
Group
Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit
Note# Note Note# Note
25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push
30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft Snare H Soft 2
SD Rock H Snare L SD Rock H
44 G# 132G# 0Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H Bass Drum H
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2
47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum H BD Rock BD Analog L
48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Bass Drum 2
BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog H
49 C# 237C# 1Side Stick
Analog Side Stick
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L Analog Snare 1
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H SD Rock Rim SD Rock H Analog Snare 2
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L
Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 E Tom 1 Analog Tom 1
54 F# 242F# 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed
Analog HH Closed 1
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H
Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Analog Tom 2
56 G# 244G# 1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal
Analog HH Closed 2
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom
Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Analog Tom 3
58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open
Analog HH Open
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L
Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 E Tom 4 Analog Tom 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H
Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 5 Analog Tom 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1
Analog Cymbal
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom
Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Tom 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal
68 G# 356G# 2Cowbell Analog Cowbell
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2
70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open
Analog Conga M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L
Analog Conga L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas
83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H
84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L
85 C# 573C# 4Guiro Short
86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4Claves Analog Claves
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4Cuica Mute Scratch Push Scratch Push
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open
Scratch Pull Scratch Pull
92 G# 580G# 4 2 Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree
97 C# 685C# 5
98 D 6 86 D 5
99 D# 687D# 5
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
63
Drum Kit List
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
147 148 149 150 122 151 152 153
127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/128 126/000/001 126/000/002 126/000/113
Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit
Alternate
Group
StdKit1 +
Chinese Perc.
SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Sound Effect Kit
Drum Loop
Reverse Cymbal
Hi Q 2
AnSD Snappy SD Jazz H Light Brush Slap L
AnBD Dance-1 Bass Drum L
AnSD OpenRim
AnBD Dance-2 Gran Cassa
AnBD Dance-3 BD Jazz BD Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call Heartbeat
Analog Side Stick
Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Footsteps
AnSD Q SD Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Sn M
Door Slam Door Squeak
String Slap Scratch Cut Door Slam
AnSD Ana+Acoustic SD Jazz M Brush Tap Marching Sn H
Scratch Applause
An alo g To m 1 Ja zz Tom 1 Bru sh Tom 1 J az z To m 1
Wind Chime Camera
Analog HH Closed 3
Telephone Ring 2 Horn
An alo g To m 2 Ja zz Tom 2 Bru sh Tom 2 J az z To m 2
Hiccup
Analog HH Closed 4
Cuckoo Clock
An alo g To m 3 Ja zz Tom 3 Bru sh Tom 3 J az z To m 3
Stream
Analog HH Open 2
Frog
An alo g To m 4 Ja zz Tom 4 Bru sh Tom 4 J az z To m 4
Rooster
An alo g To m 5 Ja zz Tom 5 Bru sh Tom 5 J az z To m 5
Dog
Analog Cymbal
Hand Cym. L Cat
An alo g To m 6 Ja zz Tom 6 Bru sh Tom 6 J az z To m 6
Owl
Hand Cym.Short L Horse Gallop
Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Horse Neigh
Car Tires Squeal Cow
Car Passing Lion
Car Crash Scratch
Analog Cowbell
Siren Yo!
Hand Cym. H Tra in G o!
Jet Plane Get up!
Hand Cym.Short H Starship Whoow!
Burst
Huuaah!
Roller Coaster
Analog Conga H
Submarine
Analog Conga M
Analog Conga L
4 Dagu Mute
5 Zhongcha Mute Shower Laugh
4 Dagu Heavy Thunder Scream
Analog Maracas
5 Zhongcha Open Wind Punch
Paigu Middle Stream Heartbeat
Paigu Low Bubble Footsteps
Uh!+Hit
6 Xiaocha Mute Feed
Bangu
Analog Claves
6 Xiaocha Open
Bangzi
Muyu Low
Scratch Push
7 Zhongluo Mute
Scratch Pull
Muyu Mid-Low
7 Zhongluo Open
Muyu Middle
Xiaoluo Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open Dog Machine Gun
Horse Laser Gun Applause 1
Bird Tweet 2 Explosion Applause 2
Firework Applause 3
Applause 4
Maou
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
64
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Style List
Style No. Style Name
8 BEAT
001 8BeatModern
002 60’sGtrPop
003 8BeatAdria
004 60’s8Beat
005 8Beat
006 OffBeat
007 60’sRock
008 HardRock
009 RockShuffle
010 8BeatRock
16 BEAT
011 16Beat
012 PopShuffle
013 GuitarPop
014 16BtUptempo
015 KoolShuffle
016 HipHopLight
BALLAD
017 PianoBallad
018 LoveSong
019 6/8ModernEP
020 6/8SlowRock
021 OrganBallad
022 PopBallad
023 16BeatBallad
DANCE
024 EuroTrance
025 Ibiza
026 SwingHouse
027 Clubdance
028 ClubLatin
029 Garage1
030 Garage2
031 TechnoParty
032 UKPop
033 HipHopGroove
034 HipShuffle
035 HipHopPop
DISCO
036 70’sDisco
037 LatinDisco
038 SaturdayNight
039 DiscoHands
SWING & JAZZ
040 BigBandFast
041 BigBandBallad
042 JazzClub
043 Swing1
044 Swing2
045 Five/Four
046 Dixieland
047 Ragtime
R & B
048 Soul
049 DetroitPop
050 6/8Soul
051 CrocoTwist
052 Rock&Roll
053 ComboBoogie
054 6/8Blues
COUNTRY
055 CountryPop
056 CountrySwing
057 Country2/4
058 Bluegrass
LATIN
059 BrazilianSamba
060 BossaNova
061 Forro
062 Tijuana
063 Mambo
064 Salsa
065 Beguine
066 Reggae
BALLROOM
067 VienneseWaltz
068 EnglishWaltz
069 Slowfox
070 Foxtrot
071 Quickstep
072 Tango
073 Pasodoble
074 Samba
075 ChaChaCha
076 Rumba
077 Jive
TRAD & WORLD
078 USMarch
079 6/8March
080 GermanMarch
081 PolkaPop
082 OberPolka
083 Tarantella
084 Showtune
085 ChristmasSwing
086 ChristmasWaltz
087 ScottishReel
WALTZ
088 SwingWaltz
089 JazzWaltz
090 CountryWaltz
091 OberWalzer
092 Musette
CHILDREN
093 Learning2/4
Style No. Style Name
094 Learning4/4
095 Learning6/8
096 Fun 3/4
097 Fun 4/4
PIANIST
098 Stride
099 PianoSwing
100 PianoBoogie
101 Arpeggio
102 Habanera
103 SlowRock
104 8BeatPianoBallad
105 6/8PianoMarch
106 PianoWaltz
Style No. Style Name
65
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Music Database List
MDB No. MDB Name
POP
1AlvFever
2DayPdise
3 GoMyWay
4 HowDeep!
5 HurryLuv
6 Imagine
7JustCall
8 SultanSw
9WhitePle
10 YesterPf
ROCK
11 JumpRock
12 PickUpPc
13 RdRiverR
14 SatsfyGt
15 Sheriff
16 SmokeWtr
17 TwistAgn
18 VenusPop
DANCE
19 2 of Us
20 B Leave
21 Back St
22 Crockett
23 FunkyTwn
24 KillSoft
25 Nine PM
26 SingBack
27 StrandD
BALLAD
28 AdelineB
29 CatMemry
30 ElvGhett
31 Feeling
32 Mn Rivr
33 OnMyMnd
34 OverRbow
35 ReleseMe
36 SavingLv
37 SmokyEye
38 WhisprSx
R & B
39 AmazingG
40 BoogiePf
41 Clock Rk
42 CU later
43 HappyDay
44 RisingSn
45 ShookUp
46 TeddyBer
SWING & JAZZ
47 ChooChoo
48 HighMoon
49 InMood
50 MistySax
51 MoonLit
52 New York
53 SaintMch
54 ShearJz
55 TstHoney
56 USPatrol
EASY LISTENING
57 Close2U
58 Entrtain
59 LuvStory
60 MyPrince
61 PupetStr
62 Raindrop
63 R'ticGtr
64 SingRain
65 SmallWld
66 SpkSoft
67 StrangeN
68 TimeGoes
69 WhteXmas
70 WishStar
71 WondrWld
LATIN
72 BambaLa
73 BeHappy!
74 CopaLola
75 DayNight
76 Ipanema
77 MuchoTrp
78 Sunshine
79 Tico Org
80 TrbWave
COUNTRY
81 BoxerFlt
82 CntryRds
83 Jambala
84 TopWorld
85 YlwRose
BALLROOM
86 BrazilBr
87 CherryTp
88 DanubeWv
89 TangoAc
90 Tea4Two
TRADITIONAL
91 CampRace
MDB No. MDB Name
92 CielPari
93 GrndClok
94 JinglBel
95 MickMrch
96 Showbiz
97 StarMrch
98 WashPost
99 XmasWalz
100 YankDood
MDB No. MDB Name
66
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Song List
• Some songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original.
• A song book (free downloadable scores) is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book, complete
the user registration at the following website.
https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
Song No. Song Name
Top Picks
001 Demo 1 (Yamaha Original)
002 Demo 2 (Yamaha Original)
003 Demo 3 (Yamaha Original)
Learn to Play
004 Für Elise (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven)
005 Für Elise (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven)
006 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Basic) (Traditional)
007 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Advanced) (Traditional)
008 Turkish March (Basic) (W.A. Mozart)
009 Turkish March (Advanced) (W.A. Mozart)
010 Ode to Joy (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven)
011 Ode to Joy (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven)
012 The Entertainer (Basic) (S. Joplin)
013 The Entertainer (Advanced) (S. Joplin)
014 Londonderry Air (Basic) (Traditional)
015 Londonderry Air (Advanced) (Traditional)
016 The Last Rose of Summer (Basic) (Traditional)
017 The Last Rose of Summer (Advanced) (Traditional)
018 Amazing Grace (Basic) (Traditional)
019 Amazing Grace (Advanced) (Traditional)
Favorite
020 Frère Jacques (Traditional)
021 Der Froschgesang (Traditional)
022 Aura Lee (Traditional)
023 London Bridge (Traditional)
024 Sur le pont d'Avignon (Traditional)
025 Nedelka (Traditional)
026 Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani)
027 Sippin’ Cider Through a Straw (Traditional)
028 Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster)
029 Bury Me Not on the Lone Prairie (Traditional)
030 Cielito Lindo (Traditional)
031 Santa Lucia (A. Longo)
032 If You’re Happy and You Know It (Traditional)
033 Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster)
034 Greensleeves (Traditional)
035 Kalinka (Traditional)
036 Holdilia Cook (Traditional)
037 Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster)
038 La Cucaracha (Traditional)
039 Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza)
040 Largo (from the New World) (A. Dvořák)
041 Brahms’ Lullaby (J. Brahms)
042 Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt)
043 Pomp and Circumstance (E. Elgar)
044 Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet)
045 Jupiter, the Bringer of Jollity (G. Holst)
046 The Polovetsian Dances (A. Borodin)
047 Die Moldau (B. Smetana)
048 Salut d'Amour op.12 (E. Elgar)
049 Humoresques (A. Dvořák)
050
Symphony No.9 (from the New World - 4th movement) (A. Dvo
ř
ák)
Favorite with Style
051 O du lieber Augustin (Traditional)
052 Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional)
053 When Irish Eyes Are Smiling (E. R. Ball)
054 Little Brown Jug (Traditional)
055 Ten Little Indians (Traditional)
056 On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional)
057 My Darling Clementine (Traditional)
058 Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster)
059 Red River Valley (Traditional)
060 Turkey in the Straw (Traditional)
061 Muffin Man (R. A. King)
062 Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional)
063 Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work)
064 Camptown Races (S. C. Foster)
065 When the Saints Go Marching In (Traditional)
066 Yankee Doodle (Traditional)
067 Battle Hymn of the Republic (Traditional)
068 I’ve Been Working on the Railroad (Traditional)
069 American Patrol (F. W. Meacham)
070 Down by the Riverside (Traditional)
Instrument Master
071 Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré)
072 Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky)
073 Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi)
074
Serenade for Strings in C major, op.48 (P. I. Tchaikovsky)
075 Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II)
076 Romance de Amor (Traditional)
077 Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach)
078 Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart)
079 Radetzky Marsch (J. Strauss I)
Piano Repertoire
080 Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional)
081 Die Lorelei (F. Silcher)
082 Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop)
083 Scarborough Fair (Traditional)
084 My Old Kentucky Home (Traditional)
085 Loch Lomond (Traditional)
086 Silent Night (F. Gruber)
087 Deck the Halls (Traditional)
088 O Christmas Tree (Traditional)
089
Sonata Pathétique 2nd Adagio Cantabile (L. v. Beethoven)
090
Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod (J. S. Bach / C. F. Gounod)
091 Jesus bleibet meine Freude (J. S. Bach)
092 Prelude op.28-15 “Raindrop” (F. Chopin)
093 Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin)
094 Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” (F. Chopin)
095 Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart)
096 Arabesque (J. F. Burgmüller)
097 La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller)
098 Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven)
099 Turkish March (W.A. Mozart)
100 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin)
101 Annie Laurie (Traditional)
102 Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (S. C. Foster)
Song No. Song Name
67
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Effect Type List
Harmony Types
Reverb Types
Chorus Types
No. Harmony Type Description
01 Duet
If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while
playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three
notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that
includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played.
02 Trio
03 Block
04 Country
05 Octave
06 Trill 1/4 note
If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously.
07 Trill 1/6 note
08 Trill 1/8 note
09 Trill 1/12 note
10 Trill 1/16 note
11 Trill 1/24 note
12 Trill 1/32 note
13 Tremolo 1/4 note
If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously.
(The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.)
14 Tremolo 1/6 note
15 Tremolo 1/8 note
16 Tremolo 1/12 note
17 Tremolo 1/16 note
18 Tremolo 1/24 note
19 Tremolo 1/32 note
20 Echo 1/4 note
If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played.
(The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.)
21 Echo 1/6 note
22 Echo 1/8 note
23 Echo 1/12 note
24 Echo 1/16 note
25 Echo 1/24 note
26 Echo 1/32 note
No. Reverb Type Description
01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb.
04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb.
06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.
08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.
10 Off No effect.
No. Chorus Type Description
01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.
03–04 Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound.
05 Off No effect.
68
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
Specifications
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify
products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please
check with your Yamaha dealer.
Size/Weight
Dimensions W x D x H 945 x 369 x 132 mm(37-3/16” x 14-1/2” x 5-3/16”)
Weight 4.9kg (10 Ibs. 13 oz.) (not including batteries)
Keyboard
Number of Keys 61
Touch Response Yes
Display
Type LCD display
Backlit Yes
Language English
Panel Language English
Voices
Tone Generation Tone Generating Technology AWM Stereo Sampling
Polyphony Number of Polyphony (Max.) 32
Preset Number of Voices 140 panel voices + 13 drum/SFX kits + 344 XGlite voices
Compatibility GM/XGlite
Effects
Ty pes
Reverb 9 types
Chorus 4 types
Ultra-Wide Stereo 3 types
Harmony 26 types
Function
Dual Yes
Split Yes
Panel Sustain Yes
Accompaniment
Styles
Preset
Number of Preset Styles 106
Fingering Multi fingering
Style Control
ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit.,
MAIN/AUTO FILL
Custom User Styles Yes
Other Features
Music Database 100
One Touch Setting (OTS) Yes
Songs
Preset Number of Preset Songs 102
Recording
Number of Songs 5
Number of Tracks 2
Data Capacity
Approx. 10,000 notes (when only “melody” tracks are recorded)
Approx. 5,500 chords (when only “chord” tracks are recorded)
Recording Function Yes
Compatible Data
Format
Playback SMF
Recording Original File Format
Functions
Lesson
[1 LISTENING, 2 TIMING, 3 WAITING], [KEYS TO SUCCESS],
[PHRASE REPEAT], [CHORD DICTIONARY], [A-B REPEAT]
Overall Controls
Metronome Yes
Tempo Range 11 – 280
Transpose -12 – 0 – +12
Tuning 427.0 - 440.0 - 453.0 Hz
Miscellaneous Portable Grand Button Yes
Storage and
Connectivity
Internal Memory 1.7MB
Connectivity PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN, USB TO HOST, SUSTAIN
Amplifiers and
Speakers
Amplifiers 2.5W + 2.5W
Speakers 12cm x 2
Power Supply
Power Supply
• Adaptor: Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent
Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent
• Batteries:Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries
Power Consumption 7W (When using PA-130 power adaptor)
Auto Power Off Function Yes
Included Accessories
•Music Rest
• Owners Manual
• My Yamaha Product User Registration
AC Power adaptor* (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)
* May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your
Yamaha dealer.
Optional Accessories
• Adaptor: Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent
Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent
• Footswitch: FC4/FC5
• Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L
• Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
69
Index
A
A-B Repeat ..................................................................34
ACMP ON/OFF ..........................................................19
Auto Accompaniment ................................................19
Auto accompaniment range .......................................19
Auto Power Off .......................................................9, 43
B
Backup ...................................................................40, 45
Backup File ................................................................. 45
Battery ........................................................................... 8
Beat Display ................................................................13
BGM Playback ...........................................................26
C
Chord ...........................................................................21
Chord Dictionary ........................................................ 22
Chord Display .............................................................13
Chorus ................................................................... 17, 42
Chorus Send Level (Main, Dual and Split) ..............42
Chorus Type List ........................................................67
Computer .....................................................................44
D
DC IN ............................................................................8
Delete (File) ................................................................40
Delete (User Song) ..................................................... 39
Demo ...........................................................................26
Display ........................................................................13
Drum Kit .....................................................................14
Drum Kit List ..............................................................62
Dual .............................................................................17
E
Effect Type List ..........................................................67
Ending .........................................................................20
External Clock ............................................................ 42
F
FF .................................................................................27
Footswitch (Sustain jack) ............................................9
Function .......................................................................41
Function Setting List ............................................41–43
G
Grade ........................................................................... 32
H
Harmony ..................................................................... 16
Harmony Type List .................................................... 67
Harmony Volume ....................................................... 42
Headphones .................................................................. 9
I
Initial Send .................................................................. 43
Initialization ................................................................ 40
Intro ............................................................................. 20
K
KEYS TO SUCCESS ................................................ 28
L
Left .............................................................................. 32
Lesson ......................................................................... 28
Lesson Track R/L for transferred songs ............. 43, 46
Listening ..................................................................... 31
Local ............................................................................ 42
M
Main/Auto fill ............................................................. 20
Master EQ ..................................................................... 9
Master EQ Type ......................................................... 42
Master Volume Control ............................................... 9
Measure ....................................................................... 13
Melody Voice .............................................................. 27
Metronome .................................................................. 35
Metronome Volume ................................................... 43
MIDI ............................................................................ 42
Music Database .......................................................... 24
Music Rest .................................................................... 6
Musicsoft Downloader ............................................... 45
Mute ............................................................................ 34
N
Notation ...................................................................... 13
O
Octave (Main/Dual/Split) .......................................... 42
One Touch Setting (OTS) .......................................... 14
Option .......................................................................... 68
P
part ............................................................................... 32
Passing Status ....................................................... 13, 30
Pause ........................................................................... 27
Index
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
70
PC setting ....................................................................43
PHONES/OUTPUT .....................................................9
Phrase ..........................................................................33
Phrase Repeat ..............................................................33
PORTABLE GRAND ................................................15
Power Adaptor .............................................................. 8
Press and Hold for a while .........................................11
R
Recording ..............................................................36–38
Reverb ....................................................................17, 42
Reverb Level ...............................................................42
Reverb Type List ......................................................... 67
Rew ..............................................................................27
Rhythm ..................................................................12, 18
Right ............................................................................ 32
rit.(ritardando) .............................................................20
Root .......................................................................21–22
S
Save data to computer ................................................ 45
Section .........................................................................20
SMF Format ................................................................ 45
Song .......................................................................12, 25
Song Book ............................................................... 6, 48
Song List .....................................................................66
Song Volume ...............................................................41
Split ..............................................................................17
Split Point ..............................................................19, 41
START/STOP .............................................................12
Step .............................................................................. 28
Style .......................................................................12, 18
Style File ..................................................................... 46
Style List .....................................................................64
Style Volume ............................................................... 41
Supplied Accessories ............................................. 6, 68
Sustain (Footswitch) ..................................................... 9
Sustain (Panel) ......................................................17, 42
Synchro Start ..............................................................19
T
Tempo ..........................................................................35
TEMPO/TAP .............................................................. 35
Time Signature ...................................................... 35, 43
Timing ......................................................................... 31
Touch Response .......................................................... 15
Touch sensitivity ......................................................... 41
Track ................................................................13, 34, 37
Track Rec ..............................................................37–38
Transfer .......................................................................45
Transpose ....................................................................41
Tuning ......................................................................... 41
U
Ultra-Wide Stereo ...................................................... 15
USB ....................................................................... 10, 44
User Song .................................................................... 36
V
Vo i c e ...................................................................... 12, 14
Vo i c e L i s t .................................................................... 58
Volume (Main Voice/Dual Voice/Split Voice) ......... 42
Volume (Song) ............................................................ 41
Volume (Style) ............................................................ 41
W
Waiting ........................................................................ 31
X
XGlite ............................................................................ 6
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
71
Memo
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
72
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should
not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with
your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human
health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or
the point of sale where you purchased the items.
[For business users in the European Union]
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the
correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical
involved.
(weee_battery_eu_en)
OBSERVERA!
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den
ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.
ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,
sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også
selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko
laitetta verkosta.
(standby)
Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb
Deutschlands)
Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien
oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei
einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben
werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.
(battery)
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.
90620
Telephone : 714-522-9011
Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard
Model Name : PSR-E333/YPT-330
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is
suspected.
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(FCC DoC)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-
tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not
expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by
the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/
or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s
supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the
requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital
devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-
able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-
tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies
and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in
the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation
of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does
not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If
this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be
determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-
nate the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con-
tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,
6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
73
PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual
74
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha
ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
Para obter detalhes de produtos, entre em contato com o
representante mais próximo da Yamaha ou com o distribuidor
autorizado relacionado a seguir.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más
cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Подробные сведения об инструменте можно получить у местного
представителя корпорации Yamaha или уполномоченного
дистрибьютора, указанного в следующем списке.
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Digital Musical Instruments Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-3273
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte
Madero Este-C1107CEK
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 011-4119-7000
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND
Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Switzerland in Zürich
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/
HUNGARY/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025
POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTO-
NIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland
Tel: 022-500-2925
THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia)
Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,
121059, Russia
Tel: 495 626 5005
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,
Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDIA
Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.
5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex
Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India
Tel: 0124-466-5551
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 021-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3467-3300
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 03-78030900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music (Asia) Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 6747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2622
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Works LTD
P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,
New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
EKB54
U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division
© 2011 Yamaha Corporation
012POTY*.*-01A0
Printed in China
WW13050
Yamaha Global Home
http://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Documenttranscriptie

DIGITAL KEYBOARD Owner’s Manual Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 4–5. EN (US only) LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON PORTABLE KEYBOARDS (NP, NPV, PSRE, YPG AND YPT SERIES) Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/ noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA. ©2009 Yamaha Corporation of America. 2 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) Serial No. Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, shortcircuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Battery • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 68) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Water warning • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. • Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together with old ones. • Do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries. • Do not dispose of batteries in fire. • Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged. • Keep batteries away from children. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. • Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery fluid. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. • The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. • It emits unusual smells or smoke. • Some object has been dropped into the instrument. • There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Connections • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Handling caution Location • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. DMI-3 4 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. 1/2 Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the power switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. NOTICE To avoid the possibility of malfunction/damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.  Handling and Maintenance • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.  Saving data • Some data items (page 40) are automatically saved as backup data in the internal memory even if you turn the power off. Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external device such as a computer (page 45). The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom)  About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.  About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.  About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • Apple, Mac and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. DMI-3 2/2 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 5 About the Manuals This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.  Included Documents Owner’s Manual (this book)  Online Materials (Downloadable from the web) The following instructional materials are available for downloading from the Yamaha website. Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Access the Yamaha Manual Library, then enter your model name (PSR-E333, for example) in the Model Name area to search the manuals. MIDI Data Format This document contains both the MIDI Data Format and the MIDI Implementation Chart. MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish) If you want to know more about MIDI and how to use it, refer to this introductory book. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ You can refer to the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the above website. Song book (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Formats and functions GM System Level 1 STYLE FILE “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GMcompatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. Supplied Accessories • Owner’s manual (this book) • Music rest • AC Power Adaptor * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • My Yamaha Product User Registration * The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. 6 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). Touch Response The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices. Using the music rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. Contents About the Manuals................................................ 6 Formats and functions .......................................... 6 Supplied Accessories ........................................... 6 Using the music rest ............................................. 6 Introduction Setting Up 8 Power Requirements ............................................ 8 Connecting headphones and external audio equipment ........................................................ 9 Connecting a footswitch ....................................... 9 Turn on the power ................................................ 9 Auto Power Off function........................................ 9 Removing the protective film ................................ 9 Panel Controls and Terminals 10 Basic Operation and Displays 12 Basic Operation .................................................. 12 Display................................................................ 13 Reference Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 14 Select and Play a Voice...................................... 14 Playing the Grand Piano Voice........................... 15 Try playing with enhanced, dynamic sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo)........................................ 15 Touch Response Sensitivity ............................... 15 Adding Harmony................................................. 16 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual........ 17 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split.................................................. 17 Play with a Style 18 Select a Style Rhythm ........................................ 18 Play Along with a Style ....................................... 19 Pattern Variation (Sections)................................ 20 Chords ................................................................ 21 Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary . 22 Try Playing a Song with a Style!......................... 23 Play Using the Music Database.......................... 24 Playing Songs Using the Lesson Feature 28 Keys to Success..................................................28 Listening, Timing and Waiting .............................31 Phrase Repeat .................................................... 33 A-B Repeat..........................................................34 Mute .................................................................... 34 Using the Metronome..........................................35 Changing the Tempo...........................................35 Record Your Own Performance 36 Recording............................................................ 36 Recording to a Specific track ..............................37 Deleting User Songs ...........................................39 Backup and Initialization 40 Backup ................................................................40 Initialization .........................................................40 Function Settings 41 Select the item and change the value .................41 Connecting to a Computer 44 Connecting a Personal Computer .......................44 Transferring data between the instrument and a computer .....................................................45 Registering Style Files ........................................46 Appendix Troubleshooting............................................. 47 Song Book Sample ........................................ 48 Voice List ........................................................ 58 Drum Kit List .................................................. 62 Style List ......................................................... 64 Music Database List ...................................... 65 Song List......................................................... 66 Effect Type List .............................................. 67 Specifications................................................. 68 Index................................................................ 69 25 Select and Listen to a Specific Song .................. 25 Listening to the Demo Songs ............................. 26 BGM Playback.................................................... 26 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause .. 27 Changing the Melody Voice................................ 27 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 7 Setting Up Introduction Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. Using an AC Power Adaptor 1 Make sure that the [ ] (Standby/On) switch of the instrument is off (the backlit display is off). WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (page 68). The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument. 2 Connect the AC power adaptor to the power supply jack. 3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. 2 AC power adaptor 3 AC outlet Using Batteries 1 Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. 2 Insert the six new alkaline batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the side of the compartment. 3 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. NOTICE • Never connect or disconnect the AC power adaptor when the batteries are installed in the instrument and the power is on. Doing so will turn the power off, possibly resulting in loss of the data being transferred as well as the data currently in the transfer destination during transferring or recording of data. For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries, following the precautions listed below. If necessary, also make sure to save all important User data (see page 45), since custom panel settings are lost when the batteries are removed. WARNING • Make sure to install the batteries with the proper orientation, maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals. • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time. • If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the batteries from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from the battery. NOTICE • Use alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may have sudden drops of power when battery power becomes low, possibly resulting in loss of data in the flash memory. • Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost. 8 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Setting Up Make all necessary connections BEFORE turning the power on. Connecting headphones and external audio equipment Turn on the power Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by using the [MASTER VOLUME] control. Pressing the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again turns the power off. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a set of headphones, keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. The internal speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. NOTE • You can set the Master equalizer (EQ) which is provided to give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems. The Master equalizer (EQ) can be set in the Function settings (page 42 Function 023). CAUTION • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. CAUTION • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting and turn power off the devices before connecting them. Failure to observe these precautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. CAUTION • When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument. Auto Power Off function To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that will elapse before the power is automatically turned off can be set in the Function (page 43 Function 040). Setting range: 5/10/15/30/60/120/OFF (minutes) Default setting: 30 (minutes) To disable the Auto Power Off function While holding down the lowest key, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. Alternately select “Off” in the Function settings. Connecting a footswitch The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing an optional footswitch. Plug the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into the SUSTAIN jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. NOTE • The data and settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. For information on the backup parameters, see page 40. NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. Removing the protective film Remove the transparent protective film that was applied to the display prior to shipment from the factory. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 9 Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel q w e r t [ ] (Standby/On) switch..................................... page 9 [MASTER VOLUME] control ................................ page 9 [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button .... page 31 [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button............................. page 28 [PHRASE REPEAT] button ................................ page 33 Front Panel Music Database List (page 65) In the Lesson mode y PART [L] button ............................................................ page 32 [R] button ............................................................ page 32 q e In the Recording mode y [REC TRACK 2] button....................................... page 37 [REC TRACK 1] button....................................... page 37 w r t u i o !0 !1 !2 !3 !4 [METRONOME] button....................................... page 35 [TEMPO/TAP] button.......................................... page 35 [SONG] button ............................................ pages 12, 25 [VOICE] button ........................................... pages 12, 14 [STYLE] button ........................................... pages 12, 18 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+/YES], [-/NO]........... page 12 [FUNCTION] button ............................................ page 41 [DEMO/BGM] button .......................................... page 26 !5 In the Song mode !5 !6 !7 !8 [A-B REPEAT] button ......................................... page 34 [REW] button ...................................................... page 27 [FF] button .......................................................... page 27 [PAUSE] button................................................... page 27 !5 !6 !7 !8 [ACMP ON/OFF] button ..................................... page 19 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button............................... page 20 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.................................. page 20 [SYNC START] button ........................................ page 19 !9 @0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 @8 [START/STOP] button ................................ pages 12, 25 [REC] button ....................................................... page 36 [PORTABLE GRAND] button ............................. page 15 [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............................... page 24 [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button ........................ page 15 [SPLIT] button .................................................... page 17 [DUAL] button..................................................... page 17 [HARMONY] button ............................................ page 16 [TOUCH] button.................................................. page 15 Drum Kit icons ................................................... page 14 In the Style mode Rear Panel @9 #0 #1 #2 10 SUSTAIN jack ....................................................... page 9 USB terminal ...................................................... page 44 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ........................................ page 9 DC IN jack ............................................................. page 8 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual @8 !6 !7 !8 Panel Controls and Terminals Voice List (page 58) Display (page 13) u i 001 GrandPno Style List (page 64) o !2 !3 !4 !0 001 y !9 Song List (page 66) !1 @1 @0 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 Rear Panel @9 #0 #1 #2 The “Press & Hold” Symbol Buttons having this indication can be used to call up an alternate function when the relevant button is pressed and held. Hold down this button until the function is called up. C3 (Middle C) PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 11 Basic Operation and Displays Basic Operation Press a button to select a basic function: Voice, Style or Song. To change the instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard, press the [VOICE] button. If you want to play along with auto accompaniment, press the [STYLE] button. If you want to listen to a song, press the [SONG] button. 3 Display (page 13) 001 1 2 GrandPno 001 1 Select a basic function. [SONG] button .............. To select a Song. [VOICE] button .............. To select a Voice. [STYLE] button.............. To select a Style. When you select a basic function, the name and number of the currently selected Song, Style or Voice is shown. 2 Select an item or value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Song, Voice and Style Lists on pages 58–66. Number buttons [0]–[9] The number buttons can be used to directly enter a Song, Style or Voice number or parameter value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the first zeroes can be omitted. Example: Selecting Voice 002, Bright Piano. Press number buttons [0], [0], [2]. 3 [+], [-] buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. Press briefly to decrease. Start a function or play the keyboard. Voice ............................. Play the keyboard. Song ............................. Press the [START/STOP] button to play Songs. Style.............................. Press the [START/STOP] button to play the Style rhythm. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 12 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Press briefly to increase. Basic Operation and Displays Display The Main display shows all of the current basic settings for Song, Style and Voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status for various functions. SONG/VOICE/STYLE TOUCH RESPONSE Appears when Touch Response is on (page 15). KEYS TO SUCCESS Indicate the operating condition of the instrument (page 12). Appears when the Keys to Success function is on (page 28). ULTRA-WIDE STEREO Appears when ULTRA-WIDE STEREO is on (page 15). PHRASE REPEAT Appears when the Phrase Repeat function is on (page 33). Notation Displays the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use, or the notes of chords you specify when the Dictionary function is in use. At other times the notes you play on the keyboard are displayed. SPLIT Passing Status Song: ✩✩✩ Appears when the Split function is on (page 17). ✩✩✩ ✩✩✩ ✩✩✩ NOTE The number of stars depends on the number of passed steps. • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va” in the notation. ACMP ON Appears when the auto accompaniment is on (page 19). DUAL Appears when the Dual function is on (page 17). Step: ✩ • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. HARMONY Appears when the Harmony function is on (page 16). 001 GrandPno 003 Chord Display Indicates the name of the chord currently being played back, or the name of the chord being played on the keyboard. Measure Indicates the current measure during playback of a Song. 003 Function Indicates the Function number when the Function is in use. 027 Keyboard Display Indicates notes currently being played. Indicates the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use. Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord or when using the Dictionary function. Song/recording track display Information related to the Song/ recording tracks is shown here. (See pages 34 and 36.) Lit: Track contains data Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data Flashing: Track is selected as recording track Beat Display Indicates the beat of the current Style or Song with flashing arrows. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 13 Reference Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices This instrument features a variety of realistic, built-in voices. The grand piano Voice is automatically selected whenever the power is turned on, but you can easily change this to guitar, drums, or any of an extensive range of voices. Voice 001 GrandPno 001 Percussion and drum icons Grand Piano Voice Ultra-Wide Stereo Touch Response Select and Play a Voice Press the [VOICE] button and then select the desired Voice, referring to the section “Basic Operation” on page 12 for instructions. Refer to the Voice List on page 58. Voice number 001 GrandPno 001 Voice name The Voice shown here becomes the Main Voice for the instrument. Preset Voice Types 14 001–140 Instrument Voices 141–153 (Drum Kit) Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, from which they can be played. Details on the instruments and key assignments of each Drum Kit can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 62. 154–497 XGlite Voices 000 One Touch Setting (OTS) The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most suitable Voice for you when you select a Style or Song. Simply select Voice number “000” to activate this feature. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Playing the Grand Piano Voice When you simply want to play a piano Voice, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. The Voice “Grand Piano” will automatically be selected as the Main Voice. Try playing with enhanced, dynamic sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo) You can play the keyboard with a spacious, dynamic sound effect that gives you the sensation of hearing the sound outside of the speakers. Turn on the Ultra-Wide Stereo effect, and hear the sound expand around you—as if the speaker position is outside of the instrument. NOTE Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button. • The wide effect type can be set in the Function settings (page 42 Function 024). GrandPno 001 SHORTCUT You can jump directly to the Functions Settings by pressing and holding the [ULTRAWIDE STEREO] button for longer than a second. Appears when Ultra-Wide Stereo is on. To turn ULTRA-WIDE STEREO off, press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button again. Touch Response Sensitivity Press the [TOUCH] button to turn Touch Response on. When Touch Response is on, you can control the volume of notes according to how hard you play the keys. Touch Response is normally on. GrandPno NOTE • The Touch Response function cannot be used for some Voices (such as organ), even if the Touch Response icon appears in the display. • When Touch Response is on you can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps in the Function settings (page 41 Function 006). 001 Appears when Touch Response is on. Press the [TOUCH] button again to turn Touch Response off. When Touch Response is off, the same volume will be produced no matter how hard you play the keys. SHORTCUT You can jump directly to the Function settings by pressing and holding the [TOUCH] button for longer than a second. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 15 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Adding Harmony This feature adds harmony notes as well as tremolo or echo effects to the Main Voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn Harmony on. When you don’t want to add harmony notes, press the [HARMONY] button again to turn Harmony off. GrandPno 001 2 Currently selected Harmony type 3 Trio Select a desired Harmony type by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 67. Try playing the keyboard with the Harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different—refer to the section “How to sound each Harmony type” below as well as the Harmony Type list for details. How to sound each Harmony type • Harmony type 01–05 Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when auto accompaniment is on (page 19). • Harmony type 13–19 (Tremolo) Keep holding down the keys. • Harmony type 06–12 (Trill) • Harmony type 20–26 (Echo) Hold down two keys. Play the keys. You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 42 Function 026). 16 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual • When you press the [HARMONY] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate Harmony type for the currently selected Main Voice is automatically selected. Appears when Harmony is on. Press and hold the [HARMONY] button for longer than a second. “HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the Harmony Type. 02 NOTE NOTE • You can also access the Harmony Type setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times (page 42 Function 025). • Harmony will be turned off if the Chord Dictionary function is used. NOTE • The Harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no Harmony notes when auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual You can select a second Voice which will play in addition to the Main Voice selected on page 12. This second Voice is known as the Dual Voice. Two Voices sound at the same time Press the [DUAL] button to turn the Dual function on. When Dual is on, you can play a Dual Voice in a layer with the Main Voice. To turn the Dual Voice off and play only the Main Voice, press the [DUAL] button again. NOTE • The Dual Voice setting can be changed in the Function settings (page 42 Function 011). SHORTCUT You can jump directly to the Function settings by pressing and holding the [DUAL] button for longer than a second. Flute 001 Appears when dual is on • When you select a Voice of the “DUAL” category (123–132), Dual is turned on automatically. Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split In the Split mode you can play different Voices to the left and right of the keyboard “Split Point.” The main and Dual Voices can be played to the right of the Split Point, while the Voice played to the left of the Split Point is known as the “Split Voice” Split Point ...... default setting: 54 (F#2) 36 60 48 Split Voice 72 84 Main Voice and Dual Voice Press the [SPLIT] button to turn the Split function on. When Split is on you can play a Split Voice to the left of the Split Point. When you don’t want to play a Split Voice, press the [SPLIT] button to turn Split off. • The Split Voice setting can be changed in the Function settings (page 42 Function 015). SHORTCUT You can jump directly to the Function settings by pressing and holding the [SPLIT] button for longer than a second. Choir 001 NOTE Appears when Split is on. • The Split Point setting can be changed in the Function Settings (page 41 Function 005). Adding other effects to the sound You can also play the sounds of the instrument adding Reverb, Chorus and Sustain. The best-suited Reverb and Chorus type is automatically selected whenever you select a Song or Style, but you can select any of the available Reverb or Chorus Types. These effects can be set in the Function settings (page 42). Refer to the Reverb and Chorus Type lists on page 67 for details. Reverb ........................This effect adds the ambience of a room or concert hall to the sound. Chorus........................This effect makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious. Panel Sustain .............This function adds a fixed sustain to the keyboard Voices. The sustain function can also be applied with the optional footswitch (page 9). PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 17 Play with a Style This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 106 different styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures. 1 Press the [STYLE] button to access the Style Functions (printed below). 001 GrandPno 001 2 35 Select a Style Rhythm Most Styles include a rhythm part. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played using percussion instruments only. Press the [STYLE] button and then select the desired Style, referring to the section “Basic Operation” on page 12 for instructions. Refer to the Style List on page 64. Style number Style name NOTE • To adjust the tempo of the Style, see page 35. 001 8BtModrn 001 Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the Style rhythm. Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback. 18 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Since the Pianist category Styles (098–106) have no rhythm parts, no sound will be produced if you start rhythm-only playback. To use these Styles, turn on the auto accompaniment and play the keyboard as described on page 19 (The bass and chord accompaniment parts will sound.) Play with a Style Play Along with a Style Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with. 1 Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired Style. For instructions on how to select a Style, see page 12. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn automatic accompaniment on. Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off. NOTE LoveSong 001 Appears when auto accompaniment is on • You can also select commercially available Style Files. To do this load the Style Files from the computer to the instrument, and then register the style data starting with Style number 107 (page 46). If the Style File has not been registered, “No data” will be displayed when selecting Style number 107. NOTE When auto accompaniment is on ... The keys to the left of the Split Point (54; F#2) will play only chords. This is known as the “Auto Accompaniment range.” • The Split Point setting can be changed in the Function settings (page 41 Function 005). Split Point........ default setting: 54 (F#2) 36 60 48 72 Auto Accompaniment range 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the Sync Start function on. 018 LoveSong 001 Flashes when Sync Start is on. 4 Start playing. Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard. Try playing other chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand. NOTE 5 Stop playing. Playback will stop as soon as you press the [START/STOP] button. NOTE You can also stop playing by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button so that an appropriate ending pattern will play and then Style playback will stop (page 20). • You can also press the [START/STOP] button to begin the rhythm of the selected Style. The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a key in the Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard. • The Style Volume can be adjusted in the Function settings (page 41 Function 001). SHORTCUT You can jump directly to the Function settings by pressing and holding the [STYLE] button for longer than a second. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 19 Play with a Style Pattern Variation (Sections) The instrument features a wide variety of Style “Sections” (patterns) that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the Song you are playing. Adding an Intro Switching Main Sections Pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button before playing back the Style automatically adds a short introduction before starting the actual (Main) rhythm. When the intro finishes playing, Style playback shifts to the Main Section. There are two variations on the basic Section (A and B). This switches between the Main A and Main B Sections, automatically playing a fill-in pattern to smoothly lead into the next Section. You can also select either the Main A or B Section to start by pressing the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button before starting the Style. Adding an Ending Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button to begin playing an ending Section. Playback will stop when the ending has played all the way through. Adding a Fill-in A Fill-in pattern is automatically added before changing to Section A or B. If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button a second time (while the ending is playing) the ending will play ritardando (the tempo will gradually get slower). Recommended method for using Sections  Setup 1. Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style. 2. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. 3. Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. 4. Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to select Main A or Main B. 5. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Sync Start on. You’re now ready to play the intro.  Start playing 6. As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. 7. Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. (Switching Main Sections/Adding a Fill-in)  Ending 8. Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. (Adding an Ending) An appropriate ending Section will play and then Style playback will stop. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. 20 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Play with a Style Chords For users who are new to chords, this chart conveniently shows common chords for your reference. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details. You can also look up chords using the Chord Dictionary function in this instrument (page 22).  Indicates the root note. Major • • • • Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh C Cm C7 Cm7 CM 7 D Dm D7 Dm7 DM 7 E Em E7 Em7 EM7 C F Fm F7 Fm7 FM7 G Gm G7 Gm7 GM7 A Am A7 Am7 AM 7 B Bm B7 Bm 7 BM 7 Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2 Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted. Sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only. If you play a chord which does not exist, the name of chord is not shown in the display, and the Style plays back only rhythm and bass. Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. For root “C” C To play a major chord Press the root note () of the chord. Cm To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. C7 To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. Cm 7 To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 21 Play with a Style Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord dictionary” that shows you the individual notes of chords. This is convenient when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button for longer than a second. “Dict.” will appear in the display. Hold for longer than a second. 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled “ROOT .” (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Keys for chord type dictionary Keys for root dictionary The highest key Dict. 001 3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard labeled “CHORD TYPE .” (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Chord name (root and type) Dict. 001 Notation of chord Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. 4 22 Try playing a chord in the auto accompaniment range (refer on page 19) of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flashes. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Major chords are usually indicated by the root name only. For example, the indication “C” in a score refers to a “C Major” chord. To look up the fingering for a major chord press the root key and then the M chord type key. • These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary function: 6(9), M7(9), M7(#11), b5, M7b5, M7aug, m7(11), mM7(9), mM7b5, 7b5, sus2 Play with a Style Try Playing a Song with a Style! Let’s try out the Song “Aura Lee.” For information on how to play Styles using chords, see pages 19 and 20. Try playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand. Practice Aura Lee Recommended Style: 018 Love Song Recommended Voice: 047 String Ensemble Composer: G. Poulton Standard Chords G A D C E D7 A D C E D7 Easy Chords G PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 23 Play with a Style Play Using the Music Database You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best Voice and Style for the type of music you want to play, simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. A Music Database name will appear in the display. 001 2 AlvFever Select a Music Database. Referring to the Music Database category list printed on the panel, select a Music Database that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For example, select one from the “SWING&JAZZ” category (047–056) if you want to play jazz. 051 NOTE • Refer to the Music Database List on page 65. MoonLit 001 3 Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. A jazz Style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the Split Point (page 19). Refer to page 21 for information about playing chords. Split Point........default setting: 54 (F#2) 36 48 60 72 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. You can also stop playback by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button (page 20). 24 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • The Split Point setting can be changed in the Function settings (page 41 Function 005). Playing Songs This instrument has 102 built-in Songs. For this instrument, the term “Song” refers to the data that makes up a piece of music. Try selecting and listening to the various Songs. Start/Stop Song 001 DEMO/BGM GrandPno 001 Press the [SONG] button to access the SONG functions (printed above the buttons). Select and Listen to a Specific Song Press the [SONG] button and then select the desired Song, referring to the section “Basic Operation” on page 12 for instructions. Refer to the Song List on page 66. Song number 001 Song name Demo 1 005 Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the Song. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. NOTE • Song number “004” is automatically selected whenever the power is turned ON. When you want to select one of the Song numbers 001–003, use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. • To adjust the tempo of song playback, see page 35. • You can adjust the balance between Song playback and the notes you play on the keyboard by setting the volume of the playback sound (page 41 Function 002). SHORTCUT You can jump directly to the Function settings by pressing and holding the [SONG] button for longer than a second. These demonstration songs showcase the various sounds of the instrument. Each of these songs has two variations: an easy one which even beginners can practice with ease, and another more challenging version. We’ve collected various folk songs from around the world which have been handed down from through the generations, as well as famous classical pieces. Try playing the melody of these songs with your right hand. Enjoy performing a piece with Style accompaniment (automatic accompaniment data). (Keys to Success is designed so that you master playing the melody with your right hand first, and then learn the roots of the chords with your left hand.) These songs feature solo instruments other than piano—letting you enjoy playing other instrumental voices along with orchestral accompaniment. These included famous pieces from around the world along with well-known piano pieces. Enjoy the beautiful, resonant piano sound as you play solo or along with orchestral backing. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 25 Playing Songs Listening to the Demo Songs Press the [DEMO] button. Songs 001, 002, 003 play in sequence, and playback will continue repeatedly starting again from the first Song 001. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] or [START/STOP] button. BGM Playback With the default setting only a few of the internal songs are played back and repeated when the [DEMO/BGM] button is pressed. This setting can be changed so that all internal songs are played, or all songs transferred to the instrument from a computer are played. Four playback group settings are provided. Simply select the one that suits your needs. 1 Press and hold the [DEMO/BGM] button for longer than a second. “DemoGrp” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected repeat playback target will be displayed. NOTE • You can also set the demo group in the Function settings (page 43 Function 037). Hold for longer than a second. 2 3 Use the [+] or [-] button to select a repeat playback group from the table below. Demo Preset songs (001–003) Preset All preset songs (001–102) User All User songs (103–107) Download All songs transferred from a computer (108–) Press the [DEMO/BGM] button. The songs in the group selected play in sequence. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] or [START/STOP] button. NOTE • When User songs and Download songs data do not exist, Demo songs are played back. NOTE • You can select a song by using the [+] button after pressing the [DEMO/BGM] button. The [-] button can be used to go back to the beginning of the selected song. Random Song Playback The Random Play mode causes the songs in the group selected for BGM playback to be played back in random order. (Demo group Songs [Preset Songs 001–003] cannot be played at random.) The setting of the Random Play mode can be set in the Function settings (page 43 Function 038). 26 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Playing Songs Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward (FF), rewind (REW) and pause (PAUSE) playback of the song. [REW] button ........ Fast-reverses the Song if pressed during playback (no sound is heard during fast reverse). Decreases the measure number if pressed while playback is stopped. [FF] button............. Fast-forwards the Song if pressed during playback. Increases the measure number if pressed while playback is stopped. [PAUSE] button ..... Temporarily stops playback. Press this button a second time to resume playback from the point at which it was stopped. NOTE • When an A-B repeat (page 34) range is specified the fast reverse and forward function will only work within that range. NOTE • [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] button cannot be used during Song playback by using the [DEMO/BGM] button. Changing the Melody Voice NOTE You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other Voice you prefer. • You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song. 1 Select the Song and play it. Refer to the section “Basic Operation” on page 12. 2 Select a desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. The selected Voice sounds when you play the keyboard. 004 3 • When you select a Voice of the DUAL category (123– 132), only the Voice whose MIDI program change number is indicated in the Voice List (page 59) is played. HnkyTonk NOTE • If a Song has played through and stopped during this procedure, press the [START/STOP] button to start playback again. Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, indicating that the Voice selected in Step 2 has replaced the Song’s original melody Voice. Hold for longer than a second. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 27 Using the Lesson Feature You can practice the preset Songs using these lesson functions: “Keys to Success,” “Listening, Timing, Waiting” and “Phrase Repeat.” Keys to Success helps you master a Song, whereas Listening, Timing, Waiting helps you first master the timing then playing the correct notes. Phrase Repeat lets you select and repeatedly practice a specific phrase in the Song. If you’re using a keyboard instrument for the first time, we suggest you start with Keys to Success. You can refer to the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website: https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ Keys to Success In the “Keys to Success” mode, you can practice individual phrases in the Song (as “Steps”), letting you effectively master the Song by mastering each phrase separately. Each time you finish a specific Step, your score is shown in the display. Passing one Step (with a score of 60 or better) lets you go on to next one automatically. All preset Songs other than 001–003 can be used with this mode, especially the “LEARN TO PLAY” category Songs (004–019). 2 4 3 1 001 GrandPno 001 1 Select a song for your lesson. For this example we’ll select song “Für Elise (Basic)” from the “LEARN TO PLAY” category. For instructions on how to select a Song, see page 12. 004 2 Elise 1 Turn Keys to Success on. Pressing the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button turns the Keys to Success feature on, and a Step of the Song is automatically selected for your practice. The currently selected Step number and the lesson parts are shown in the display. Current Step number Step01 Lesson part : Right-hand lesson : Left-hand lesson : Both-hands lesson PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual • The score for “Für Elise (Basic)” is provided on page 48. • Song numbers 001 to 003 cannot be used for the Lesson feature. If you select one of these Songs, “NoLesson” is shown in the display. Appears when Keys to Success is on 28 NOTE NOTE • The total number of Steps varies depending on the Song. • Each lesson part varies depending on the Steps. Using the Lesson Feature 3 Start the Lesson. Press the [START/STOP] button to start Lesson. After the lead-in, Step 01 of the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes appear in the display. Step01 • In some Steps, the lead-in may run a little slower than normal because a ritardando or fermata section is placed before the Step. NOTE 001 You can start playing along on the keyboard as soon as the lead-in finishes. The score marker and keyboard marker in the display will indicate the notes to play. Each time you have practiced all the way through a Step, your performance will be evaluated and your score (from 0–100) is shown in the display. 068 NOTE Excellen • You can practice the specified phrase using the Lesson modes “1 Listening,” “2 Timing” or “3 Waiting” described on page 31. In these Lesson modes with the Keys to Success function, however, it is not possible to pass the Step. When you want to turn off these Lesson modes, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button a number of times to select off (“Step number” will appear in the display). NOTE • If the specified part is both hands, you cannot pass the Step until you play both hands, even if you play one of the hands well. Only a message such as “L-part is Nice” appears in the display. Displayed when you’ve passed the Step. Score of 0–59 Try the same Step again. The same Step begins automatically. Score of 60–100 You passed! The next Step begins automatically. You can select another Step as desired by using the [+]/[-] buttons. All songs have a finishing Step, and in that Step, you will practice all the way thorough the song which you have selected as a lesson Song in Step 1. When you pass all Steps, the Keys to Success mode will automatically be turned off and playback stops. NOTE 004 Elise 1 001 4 Stop Lesson. You can stop the Lesson at any time by pressing the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button. • When you want to select another Song during a lesson, press the [SONG] button to call up the currently selected Song name in the display (for three seconds), then select the Song as required using the [+]/[-] buttons or number buttons while the Song name appears. When you select the new Song, the lowest number Step not yet passed of the Song will automatically be selected for the Lesson. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 29 Using the Lesson Feature Entering and Clearing the Passing Status  Entering Passing status will automatically be entered and shown in the display when the Step or Song is selected. You can recognize at a glance whether or not you’ve passed the selected Step or Song. When Step is selected Step01 001 ✩: Passed No information: Not yet passed When Song is selected 004 Elise 1 001 ✩✩✩ : There are one or more Steps not yet passed in addition to the last Step ✩✩✩ : Only last Step passed ✩✩✩ : All Steps passed other than last Step ✩✩✩ : All Steps passed  Clearing You can clear existing passing status entries. Select the desired Song or Step for clearing the passing status and hold the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds. After the passing status has been cleared, a “Cleared” message will appear on the display. Once the operation has been completed, no information will appear even when selecting the Song or Step. Cleared Hold for longer than three seconds 30 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You cannot clear any entries during Song or Step playback. If a Song or Step is currently being played back, stop playback first. • Deleting the recorded Song will delete all Step passing status entries as well. Using the Lesson Feature Listening, Timing and Waiting You can select any Song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. Song Lesson lets you learn how to play Songs in three easy steps. The Lesson modes:  1 Listening There’s no need to play the keyboard in this mode. The model melody/chords (in other words, the musical material you should learn) of the part you selected will sound. Listen to it carefully and learn it well. NOTE • Songs that can be used with the Lesson feature include Songs transferred from a computer to flash memory (SMF Format 0 only; see page 45). The procedure for transferring songs are described on page 45. • User Songs cannot be used for the lesson. LISTEN 004 The notation and key positions of the model melody are shown in the display.  2 Timing In this mode, try playing the notes with the correct timing. Simply concentrate on playing each note in time with the rhythmic accompaniment. The correct notes sound even if you play wrong notes as long as you play in time with the rhythm. Play the notes shown in the display. TIMING 004  3 Waiting In this mode, try playing the correct notes. The notes you should play appear in the score and the keyboard on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace and tempo. NOTE • When you don’t want to change the Song playback tempo, or you want to learn using the original tempo, you can change the setting in the Function settings (page 43 Function 036). WAITING 004 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 31 Using the Lesson Feature Lesson Operation 1 Select the desired Song for your lesson. For instructions on how to select a Song, see page 12. 2 Select the part you want to practice. Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a both-hands lesson. The selected part is displayed. Left-hand lesson NOTE Right-hand lesson • The following songs are intended for use as righthand lessons, and cannot be used for left-hand or both-hands lessons. If you select a right-hand lesson Song, a “No LPart” message is shown in the display. Right Song numbers: 020–050, 071–076, 079 Left • For songs transferred from a computer, the “No LPart” indication does not appear, even when there is no left hand part in the song. Both-hands lesson BothHand 3 Select the Lesson mode. Each time the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: 1 Listening  2 Timing  3 Waiting  Off  1 Listening ...etc. The currently selected Lesson mode is shown in the display. NOTE • When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave units), depending on the Voice selected. NOTE • You can select Lesson modes by repeatedly pressing the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button. 4 5 Start Lesson. Song playback will begin automatically when you select the Lesson mode, and the appropriate notes appear in the display. Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Grade When the Lesson Song has played all the way through in Lesson mode “2 Timing” or “3 Waiting,” your performance will be evaluated in four levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. 32 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You cannot use Dual or Split Voices during lessons. • The Split Point is fixed and it cannot be changed. For the left-hand lesson, it is fixed at 59 or B2; for the left-hand chord lesson, it is fixed at 54 or F# 2. Using the Lesson Feature Phrase Repeat This function allows you to repeatedly practice difficult phrases, by selecting a phrase and repeatedly play it back. You can also mute one of the parts, and practice just the other part repeatedly. The specified phrase can also be practiced along with the Lesson modes “1 Listening,” “2 Timing” or “3 Waiting” described on page 31. Phrase mark NOTE • When you want to turn the Phrase Repeat function on, please make sure that the Keys to Success mode is off, since Phrase Repeat is not available in the Keys to Success mode. • When you want to change the Song, first turn off the Phrase Repeat function then select the Song. NOTE Repeat playback of this section Play the Song and press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button at the phrase you want to repeat. The appropriate phrase number will appear in the display and, after a lead-in, repeat playback will start. Appears when the Phrase Repeat function is on P03 • If you use the Phrase Repeat function with the Lesson modes “1 Listening,” “2 Timing” or “3 Waiting”, the evaluation function of these Lesson modes is not available. When you want to turn these Lesson modes off, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button a number of times to select off (“Phrase number” will appear in the display). REPEAT Phrase number Use the [+] or [-] buttons to select any phrase number in the Song, and stop repeat playback by pressing the [PHRASE REPEAT] button. The Phrase Repeat mode will be canceled and normal playback of the Song will continue. Specifying extended, multiple phrases You can specify an extended section for repeating (including multiple phrases) by specifying a beginning phrase (point A) and ending phrase (point B), using the [A-B REPEAT] button. You can do this either during playback or while playback is stopped. NOTE • Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song. Press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning phrase of the section you want to repeat (point A), use the [+]/[-] buttons to select the subsequent phrases you wish to include in the repeat, then press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second time. This specifies the last phrase selected as the end phrase (point B) for Phrase Repeat playback. “REPEAT” will appear on the display and the specified A-B section of the Song will now play repeatedly. (If playback is stopped, press the [START/STOP] button to start.) Stop A-B Repeat playback by pressing the [PHRASE REPEAT] button. “REPEAT” will appear on the display and the currently selected phrase will playback repeatedly. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 33 Using the Lesson Feature A-B Repeat This function lets you specify a section of a Song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. A B Repeat playback of this section Play the Song and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point), then press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). The specified A-B section of the Song will now play repeatedly. A−b REPEAT NOTE • The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure increments. • You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song is stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measures, pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button for each point, then start playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the Song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the Song. You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button. An “oFF REPEAT” message appears on the display. The A-B REPEAT mode will be canceled and normal playback of the Song will continue. NOTE • The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you select another Song mode. Mute The Song is made up by several tracks. You can mute Track 1 or Track 2 during Song playback. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as desired, allowing you to listen to the corresponding part (the part that is turned on), or practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. • Track 1 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 1] button during Song playback. • Track 2 or style track can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 2] button during Song playback. You can cancel the mute function by pressing the corresponding track buttons, [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] again during Song playback, or by selecting any other Song. 020 FrereJac 010 Pressing one of the Track buttons [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] will mute the corresponding track during Song playback. 34 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Lit: Track contains data. Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data. Using the Lesson Feature Using the Metronome The instrument features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) that is convenient for practicing. NOTE Press the [METRONOME] button to start the metronome. • You can set the time signature and the volume of the Metronome (page 43 Function 031–033). To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again. You can adjust the metronome tempo by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button (see next section). SHORTCUT You can jump directly to the Function settings by pressing and holding the [METRONOME] button for longer than a second. NOTE • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. Changing the Tempo Songs and Styles can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow. 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in the display. Current Tempo value 070 2 Tempo Set the Tempo by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. NOTE • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo. Tap Start You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—four times for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3—and the selected Song and Style rhythm will begin playing at the tapped tempo. You can change the tempo during Song or Style playback by pressing the button just twice. NOTE • In the case of a Style, the selected Style rhythm will begin playing at first. The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard (when auto accompaniment is on). • Tap tempo setting range: 32–280 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 35 Record Your Own Performance You can record up to five of your own performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers 103–107). Think of each User Song as a kind of basket or drawer for storing your recordings. Remember that you can also record a Style (containing chord changes) along with your own performance. Recording 1 NOTICE Press the [REC] button. rEC User 1 001 Flashes • If all User Songs (Song numbers 103–107) contain recorded data, Song 103 will automatically be selected. In this case, you will record over and erase any previous data in Song 103, so be careful that you won’t be erasing any material you want to keep! The lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song (Song numbers 103–107) available for recording is displayed. If you want to select the Song you will be recording, select the desired Song number by using the [+] and [-] buttons. After you’ve selected the desired User Song for recording, you can select a Style to be recorded as well. To do this, press the [STYLE] button and select the Style number while the ACMP indication is on. NOTE • Accompaniment cannot be turned on or off once the [REC] button is pressed. You can turn off the Record mode by pressing the [REC] button again ( and stop flashing). 2 Start recording. When you play the keyboard, recording will begin. Split Point 36 48 60 72 By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when auto accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is recorded with your performance. When auto accompaniment is set to off, only your keyboard performance is recorded. 36 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord changes can be recorded to the five User Songs. Record Your Own Performance 3 Stop recording. Pressing the [START/STOP] button stops recording and writes the data to the User Song. (A “Writing!” message is shown.) To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button. In order to record with the Style, turn auto accompaniment to on (see Step 2 on page 19), and then record according to the instructions. (The “ACMP ON” lights.) In order to record only your performance, turn auto accompaniment to off and record according to the normal steps. NOTICE • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory device and result in a loss of data. NOTE • Use the Musicsoft Downloader to backup the User Songs to a computer (page 45). (The “ACMP ON” is unlit.) Recording to a Specific track The User Songs are organized into two tracks: Track 1 and Track 2. You can specify the track you want to record to. About track recording If you start recording by specifying a track, the track will be overwritten (existing data in the track is deleted and replaced with the new recording). User Song Data that can be recorded to Track 2 Data that can be recorded to Track 1 Style playback* (including chord changes) or your own keyboard performance Your own keyboard performance only NOTE • Record following the steps in the previous page, and your performance will be recorded to Track 1 and the Style (if you are playing one) will be recorded to Track 2. * When playing the Style Recording to the specified track Only your keyboard performance can be recorded to Track 1. Either a Style or your performance can be recorded to Track 2, resulting in a User Song like that depicted below. User Song User Song Track 2 Track 1 Track 2 Track 1 Style Your own keyboard performance Your own keyboard performance Your own keyboard performance NOTE • You cannot record the Reverb Level, metronome click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings. • The following settings and buttons cannot be changed, or if changed, the new settings cannot be recorded if entered during the recording process. ACMP ON/OFF, Split Point, Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Harmony Type, [FUNCTION] button, [PORTABLE GRAND] button. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 37 Record Your Own Performance Selecting a specific track for recording 1 Turn ACMP (auto accompaniment) on or off, depending on what you want to record. If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on. If you want to record only your own keyboard performance, turn ACMP off. 2 Specify the track you want to record. Specify Track 2 when you want to record the Style. When you want to record your own keyboard performance, you can specify either track. • Keep in mind that both Tracks 1 and 2 will be overwritten with new data if you record without specifying the tracks. • The both “L” and “R” flashes, this indicates that you have specified Track 1 when auto accompaniment is on. If you want to record your own performance, press the [TRACK 2] button to stop the “L” flashing. If you want to record a Style, press the [REC] button to cancel the recording, and repeat the procedure from the beginning.  Recording to Track 1 While holding the [REC] button, press the [REC TRACK 1] button. rEC NOTE User 1 001 Press simultaneously Flashes when Track 1 is selected for recording.  Recording to Track 2 While holding the [REC] button, press the [REC TRACK 2] button. rEC 001 Press simultaneously 3 Flashes when track 2 is selected for recording. User 1 Lights when recorded data exists. Turns off when there is no recorded data, or when Mute is set to on (page 34) to turn off playback of the track. Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to record. rEC User 3 If you want to record Style playback to Track 2, press the [STYLE] button and select the desired Style. 4 38 Start recording Perform steps 2 and 3 on pages 36–37. By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when auto accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is recorded. Only your performance is recorded by playing the keyboard (any key is OK) when auto accompaniment is set to off. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • If you want to record only the rhythm (percussion) part, press the [START/STOP] button to play just the rhythm, then add the section change by pressing the [INTO/ENDING/rit.] button or [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. • You can record a new track while listening to a previously recorded track (the track indication will appear). You can also mute recorded tracks (the track will disappear) while recording a new track by pressing the desired track button. Record Your Own Performance Deleting User Songs NOTE Deleting an entire User Song. • You cannot delete a specific track from a User Song. 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the User Song you want to delete by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. 103 2 User 1 Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second. The Song Delete display appears. YES ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second. You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] button. 3 Press the [+/YES] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. YES Sure? You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] button. 4 Press the [+/YES] button to delete the Song. “Writing!” message will appear while the track is being deleted. 000 Writing! PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 39 Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation “Initialization” as explained below. NOTE Backup parameters • User Songs • Style Number 107 • Touch Response on/off • Passing status of Song and Step • FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Your Tempo, Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Demo Cancel, Master EQ type, Panel Sustain, Auto Power Off • You can save the settings as backup data to your computer, by using the Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. Refer to the section “Transferring data between the instrument and a computer” on page 45. Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. Initialization To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory turn the power on by pressing the [ ] (Standby/On) switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. Initialization does not delete the files transferred from the computer. If you want to delete the files, see “Deleting Files” below. NOTICE • When you execute the Initialization, backup parameters will be cleared. Deleting Files To clear song and style files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory NOTICE • When you delete the files, from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [ ] (Standby/On) switch while Song data and Style data simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest you have purchased and downloaded will also be black keys. cleared. Make sure to save your important data by transferring to a computer using Musicsoft Downloader (page 45). 40 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Function Settings The [FUNCTION] button gives you access to a variety of operations related to adjusting or enhancing the sound and making settings for connection to external devices. For more about the available functions, see the following Function Setting List. Select the item and change the value 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the desired item appears. Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, the Function number increases one by one. You can also decrease the Function number by one when you press the [-] button briefly while holding down the [FUNCTION] button. Value 100 NOTE • The Function number will not appear in the display during Song, Style or metronome playback. The measure will appear instead. Function item StyleVol 001 Function number If the Function includes sub-modes, the Function item appears in the display for a few seconds, and the sub-modes will be displayed. 2 Set the value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Direct numeric entry. NOTE • Some Function settings are stored in memory as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on page 40 for information on the Function settings that are stored on the instrument. • To exit the Function settings, press one of these buttons; [SONG], [VOICE],[STYLE] or [GRAND PIANO]. • Decrement value by 1. • No • Off • Increment value by 1. • Yes • On Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. Function Setting List No. Item Display Range/ settings Default setting Description Volume 001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Style. 002 Song Volume SongVol 100 Determines the volume of the Song. 00 Determines the pitch of the instrument in semitone increments. NOTE: The pitch of the Drum Kits Voices cannot be changed. 440.0 (Hz) Determines the fine tuning of the pitch of the entire instrument in approx. 0.2Hz increments. NOTE: The pitch of the Drum Kits Voices cannot be changed. 54 (F#2) Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. 2 Medium When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the feature. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics. 000–127 Overall 003 Transpose Transpos -12–00–12 004 Tuning Tuning 427.0–453.0 (Hz) 005 Split Point SplitPnt 000–127 (C-2–G8) 006 Touch Sensitivity 1 Soft TouchSns 2 Medium 3 Hard PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 41 Function Settings No. Item Display Range/ settings Default setting Description Style File 007 Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn – Select and register a Style file from flash files that are loaded from computer (page 46). Main Voice 008 Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Main Voice to adjust the balance between Song playback and the notes you play on the keyboard. 009 Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–0–2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice. 010 Main Voice Chorus Send Level M.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. * Selects the Dual Voice. Dual Voice 011 Dual Voice D.Voice 012 Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 0–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. 013 Dual Voice Octave D.Octave * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice. 014 Dual Voice Chorus Send Level D.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Selects the Split Voice. 001–497 -2–0–2 Split Voice 015 Split Voice S.Voice 001–497 * 016 Split Voice Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice. 017 Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–0–2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice. 018 Split Voice Chorus Send Level S.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. 019 Reverb Type Reverb ** Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 67. 020 Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 64 Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. 021 Chorus Type Chorus 1–5 ** Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 67. 022 Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF 023 Master EQ Type MasterEQ 1 Speaker 2 Flat 024 Wide Type Wide 1–3 Effect 01–10 OFF Determines whether or not Panel Sustain is always applied to the Main/Dual/Split Voices. Panel Sustain is applied continuously when ON, or not applied when OFF. 1 Speaker Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. Speaker: For listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers. Flat: For headphones, or for listening via external speakers. 2 Determines the Ultra-Wide Stereo type. Higher values produce a greater Wide effect. Harmony 025 Harmony Type HarmType 01– 26 * Determines the Harmony type. Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 67. 026 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when one of the Harmony types 1–5 is selected. PC Mode PC mode OFF/PC1/PC2 OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 43). MIDI 027 42 028 Local On/Off Local ON/OFF ON Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). On Both the notes played on the instrument’s keyboard and data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will be played by the internal tone generator. Off With this setting, the instrument itself produces no sound, but the performance data is transmitted via the MIDI terminal. Data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will also be played by the internal tone generator. 029 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Function Settings No. 030 Item Initial Setup Send Range/ settings Display Default setting Description InitSend YES/NO – Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Use the [+] button to transmit the data. ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome. A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”. ** Sets the length of each metronome beat. Metronome 031 Time Signature Numerator TimeSigN 00–60 032 Time Signature Denominator TimeSigD 033 Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note Lesson 034 Lesson Track (R) R-Part 01–16 01 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Transferred Songs for Lessons” on page 46. 035 Lesson Track (L) L-Part 01–16 02 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Transferred Songs for Lessons” on page 46. 036 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON Determines whether the song playback tempo matches the speed at which you are playing (ON) or not (OFF), when using the “Waiting” Lesson mode. Demo 037 Demo Group DemoGrp 1 DEMO 2 Preset 3 User 4 Download 038 Demo Play Mode PlayMode 1 Normal 2 Random 039 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF 1 DEMO Determines the repeat playback group. 1 Normal Determines the repeat playback mode. OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/ BGM] button is pressed. Power Save 040 Auto Power Off AutoOff OFF/5/10/15/ 30/60/120 (minutes) 30 Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is automatically turned off. * Different for each voice combination. ** Different for each Song or Style combination.  PC Mode (FUNCTION 027) The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below). PC1 PC2 OFF On LOCAL Off Off EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off SONG OUT* Off Off On STYLE OUT** Off Off On KEYBOARD OUT*** Off On On NOTE • Song Out, Style Out and Keyboard Out can only be changed by the PC setting. They cannot be set independently. Song Out can be used with User Songs. * Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during Song playback. ** Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during Style playback. *** Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 43 Connecting to a Computer This instrument can be connected to a computer to allow transfer of MIDI data or a file. MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a world-standard interface for communication between electronic musical instruments and music devices. MIDI settings such as Local Control are made in the Function settings (page 42 Function 027–030). Connecting a Personal Computer 1 2 Turn off the power of the instrument before connecting a USB cable. 3 Connect the instrument and the computer via a USB cable. Turn on the power of the computer. Quit any open application software on the computer. USB terminal USB terminal Instrument USB cable 4 Turn on the power of the instrument. When you connect the instrument to a computer for the first time, the driver is installed automatically. Operating System (OS) Windows XP (SP3 or later)/Windows Vista *Only 32-bit, Windows 7, Mac OS X Version 10.5.0–10.6.x When data communication is unstable or some problem occurs even though you’ve executed the above instructions, download the Yamaha Standard USBMIDI driver from the following URL then install it to your computer. For instructions on installation, refer to the Install Guide included in the package file. http://download.yamaha.com/ For details about OS for Yamaha Standard USB-MIDI driver, visit the URL above.  Precautions when using the USB terminal When connecting the computer to the USB terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. NOTICE • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. • Before connecting the computer to the USB terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspend, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB terminal. • Quit any open application software on the computer. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.) • While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. 44 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Connecting to a Computer Transferring data between the instrument and a computer This instrument includes 102 preset Songs and 106 Styles, but you can load other Songs and Styles from your computer and use them in the same way as the preset Songs and Styles as long as the loaded Song is SMF format 0* or the loaded Style is SFF (Style File Format). Loaded Song data will be stored to Song numbers beginning with 108 and one of the loaded Style/s can be registered as the 107th Style. In order to perform the operations described in this section you will need to use a computer connected to the Internet to download the free Musicsoft Downloader application. * The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. Most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. Installing Musicsoft Downloader NOTE You can download the “Musicsoft Downloader” application from the following website. Make sure that your computer has an Internet connection. • Visit the Yamaha website for more information on the latest version of Musicsoft Downloader (version 5.6.1 or higher) and how to install it. http://download.yamaha.com/ Please visit the URL above to get the information on the computer system requirements for Musicsoft Downloader. Transferring Data by using the Musicsoft Downloader You can transmit Song files and Style Files from your computer to the Flash Memory on your instrument by Musicsoft Downloader. You can also transfer backup data (page 40) other than the “Passing status of Song and Step” to a computer as a backup file. For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and click “Help.” Data that can be loaded to this instrument from a computer • Songs : 256 Songs max (Song numbers 108–) • Data : Approx. 1.7MB • Data Format : SMF Format 0 and 1 • File : 11PK3.BUP (Backup file) ***.mid (MIDI Song) ***.sty (Style File) Musicsoft Downloader Operations Move the file from the computer to “Flash Memory” under “Electronic Musical Instruments.” NOTE • The Musicsoft Downloader application may not be able to access the instrument in the following cases: • During Style playback • During Song playback NOTICE • Use the power adaptor when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the batteries fail during the transfer. • Never turn the power off and never plug/unplug the AC power adaptor during data transmission. Not only will the data fail to be transferred and saved, but operation of the flash memory may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. NOTE • Close the window to exit from the Musicsoft Downloader and re-enable control of the instrument. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 45 Connecting to a Computer NOTE Data that can be transferred to a computer from this instrument • Backup file (11PK3.BUP: backup data containing five User Songs) • Songs transferred from a computer Musicsoft Downloader Operations Move the file from “System Drive” under “Electronic Musical Instruments” to the computer. • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from this instrument • “Passing status of Song and Step” cannot be transferred from this instrument as a “backup file.” NOTICE Erasing Transferred Song Data from Internal Memory To erase all Songs transferred from the computer, use the “Deleting Files” function on page 40. To erase specific Songs transferred from the computer, use the Delete function on Musicsoft Downloader. Using Transferred Songs for Lessons In order to use Songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the righthand and left-hand parts. Refer to the “Lesson Track (R)” or “Lesson Track (L)” in the Function Setting List on page 43. The procedure for setting the guide track is as follows: Select a transferred Song you want to use for lessons. Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “R-Part” or “L-Part” appears in the display, and then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. • The backup data, including the five User Songs is transmitted/received as a single file. As a result, all backup data (including the five Songs) will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so, it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. Registering Style Files This instrument features 106 internal Styles, but other Styles, such as those which can be obtained from the internet (only Styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be registered to Style number 107 and used in the same way as the internal Styles. In order to use the Style File register function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to the instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page 45 (“Transferring data between the instrument and a computer”). The procedure described below registers a Style file that has already been transferred from a computer to the instrument to Style number 107. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button as many times as necessary to select the Style File Load function “StyleReg” (Function 007). After about 2 seconds the name of a registerable Style file will appear in the display. If multiple loadable Style files have been transferred to the instrument, you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in sequence. 2 Execute the register operation. With the name of the Style file you want to register shown in the display, press the number [0] button. 3 A confirmation message for the register operation will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to actually register the file. 46 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual StyleReg Appendix Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off setting. (See page 42 Function 028.) Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes — including Dual voice, Split Voice, auto accompaniment, song, and Metronome. Notes exceeding this limit will not sound. Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 22), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/ Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to STOP] button is pressed. “Function Settings” on page 42 (Function 029). The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any Stylerelated function. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 41 Function 001) is set to an appropriate level. Is the Split Point set to an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the Split Point to an appropriate key (page 41 Function 005). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing, press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. The Style does not sound properly. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g., some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the oppo- The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is site effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types 06–26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12. • • • • The volume is too soft. The sound quality is poor. The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play corones, or use the optional AC adaptor. rectly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. Power suddenly and unexpectedly turns off. This is normal and the Auto Power Off function may have been activated (page 9). If you need to disable the Auto Power Off function, select “Off” in the Function settings (page 43 Function 040). PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 47 Song Book Sample This score is provided with the part of the song book (free downloadable scores). The song book contains not only the scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3) but also music terms and important points for your practice. To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ * The Song book is provided in English, French, German and Spanish. This example introduces part of the English song book. Für Elise L. v. Beethoven Basic Song No.004 Für Elise With Step Map .......................................................................12 Für Elise is an all-time classical favorite. The beautiful, well-known melody is repeated a number of times. In each step you won’t be practicing alone. You have a wonderful orchestra to back you up! First, listen to the example a few times. It won’t be long before you’ll want to start playing it yourself! Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” .................................... 14 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 15 Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment”..................................... 16 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 16 First Half Review ...................................................................... 17 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 17 Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” .................................... 18 “EEEEE!” ................................................................................ 18 “Left! Right! Left! Right!” ............................................................ 19 Second Half Review ................................................................... 19 Play the Whole Song! ................................................................. 19 48 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Before Playing... Sit Correctly Finger Numbering 3 2 4 3 2 4 5 5 1 1 Left Right Sit near the middle of the keyboard. Reading the Score The Keyboard, Staff Lines, and Clef 1 octave 2 black keys C D E 3 black keys F G A B C D E F G A B M i d d l e C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C Treble clef Bass clef Accidentals  B N (Sharp) Raise a semitone (Flat) Lower a semitone (Natural) Return to normal pitch 1 2 3 4 Whole note  Whole note rest  Dotted half note  Dotted half note rest  Half note  Half note rest Dotted quarter note  Dotted quarter note rest  Quarter note  Time signature Notes and Rests  Key signature Clef Quarter note rest Eighth note  Eighth note rest Sixteenth note  Sixteenth note rest Time Signatures and Counting Time 4/4 time 2/2 time 2/4 time 3/4 time 6/8 time 9/8 time PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 49 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Basic Für Elise With Step Map Play with both hands as if gently telling a story. It might help to sing or hum the melody as you play. Similar melody lines and rhythms are repeated in this song, so there aren’t as many sections to practice as you might think. Enjoy learning each section as you build proficiency. From here... 50 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 ...to here Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic From here... ...to here PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 51 Song Book Sample Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Let’s start with a warm-up exercise using three fingers of the right hand. ise Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” ed for this us erc ex Finge rs Song No.004 Right We’ll start by ascending and descending the white and black keys. Check out the illustrations until you understand how the fingers are supposed to move, then get started! You’ll find it easier to play if you bend your fingers slightly. M i d d l e C M i d d l e E C A E M i d d l e C A B C D Tip-toe Go back to the beginning and play it again. 52 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic Diligent Practice Time Right! Now that we’re warmed up let’s try playing along with the orchestra in 3/4 time. The melody will be built up little by little. Compare each line... notice that many of the shapes formed by the notes are very similar. Short break Almost done E PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 53 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic M i d d l e Left hand Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment” E A E A And now a warm-up exercise for the left hand. It’s important to spread your fingers widely from the start. Don’t play the black keys too strongly. Diligent Practice Time Connect the notes smoothly, as if the left hand were passing them to the right hand. You’ll be able to play smoothly if you move the left hand into position for the next phrase as soon as it finishes playing the first phrase. 54 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual C Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic First Half Review You’ve reached the halfway step! Have you learned all the material provided in the preceding steps? Now let’s go back and play through all the first-half exercises. If you find that you’re having trouble playing any of the material, go back and review the steps using the Step Map as a guide. Diligent Practice Time OK, let’s begin the second half! You’ll be able to play the melody nicely if you lift your fingers from the keyboard between the slurs. It might be easier to grasp the key release timing if you sing along with the melody. Don’t panic and play too strongly where the left hand has to play short notes. Always have left-hand finger 5 ready to play the next note! PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 55 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Left hand Jump to the next E! And again! Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” The first note has a staccato dot. Spread your fingers wide and jump quickly to the next note! M i d d l e E ngers! se fi You can play t with only the his “EEEEE!” The only note in this step is E! Make the connection between the left and right hands as smooth as possible. 56 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual E C E Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic “Left! Right! Left! Right!”  Play “D E” repeatedly, alternating the left and right hands.  Have the next hand ready in position to play D so you won’t have to rush. Left Right Second Half Review Try playing all the way through the second half. As we did after the first half, if there are places you can’t play with confidence go back and review the steps. Play the Whole Song! This is the finishing step! Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. Just concentrate on playing the entire song from start to finish. Practice this with the lessons learned in each step in mind, and gradually you’ll master the whole song. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 57 Voice List Maximum Polyphony The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). Panel Voice List Voice No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 58 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 0 112 1 Grand Piano 0 112 2 Bright Piano 0 112 7 Harpsichord 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano 0 113 3 CP 80 E.PIANO 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 0 113 6 Hyper Tines 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano 0 112 8 Clavi ORGAN 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2 0 112 19 Rock Organ 0 114 19 Purple Organ 0 112 18 Click Organ 0 116 17 Bright Organ 0 127 19 Theater Organ 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ 0 113 20 Chapel Organ 0 112 20 Pipe Organ 0 112 21 Reed Organ ACCORDION 0 112 22 Musette Accordion 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion 0 113 24 Bandoneon 0 112 23 Harmonica GUITAR 0 112 25 Classical Guitar 0 112 26 Folk Guitar 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar 0 117 28 60’s Clean Guitar 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar 0 112 28 Clean Guitar 0 113 27 Octave Guitar 0 112 29 Muted Guitar 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar BASS 0 112 34 Finger Bass 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass 0 112 35 Pick Bass 0 112 36 Fretless Bass 0 112 37 Slap Bass 0 112 39 Synth Bass 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass 0 113 40 Dance Bass STRINGS 0 112 49 String Ensemble PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take this into consideration. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. Voice No. 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 112 50 Chamber Strings 0 113 50 Slow Strings 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings 0 112 51 Synth Strings 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 112 41 Violin 0 112 43 Cello 0 112 44 Contrabass 0 112 47 Harp 0 112 106 Banjo 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 0 112 53 Choir 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble 0 112 55 Air Choir 0 112 54 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 0 112 66 Alto Sax 0 112 65 Soprano Sax 0 112 68 Baritone Sax 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 112 72 Clarinet 0 112 69 Oboe 0 112 70 English Horn 0 112 71 Bassoon TRUMPET 0 112 57 Trumpet 0 112 58 Trombone 0 113 58 Trombone Section 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet 0 112 61 French Horn 0 112 59 Tuba BRASS 0 112 62 Brass Section 0 113 62 Big Band Brass 0 113 63 80’s Brass 0 119 62 Mellow Horns 0 114 63 Techno Brass 0 112 63 Synth Brass FLUTE 0 112 74 Flute 0 112 73 Piccolo 0 112 76 Pan Flute 0 112 75 Recorder 0 112 80 Ocarina SYNTH 0 112 81 Square Lead 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead 0 115 82 Analogon 0 119 82 Fargo 0 112 99 Star Dust 0 112 86 Voice Lead 0 112 101 Brightness 0 112 92 Xenon Pad 0 112 95 Equinox Voice List Voice No. 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 112 89 Fantasia 0 113 90 Dark Moon 0 113 101 Bell Pad PERCUSSION 0 112 12 Vibraphone 0 112 13 Marimba 0 112 14 Xylophone 0 112 115 Steel Drums 0 112 9 Celesta 0 112 11 Music Box 0 112 15 Tubular Bells 0 112 48 Timpani WORLD 0 115 111 Er Hu 0 117 74 Di Zi 0 116 106 Pi Pa 0 0 105 Sitar 0 0 16 Dulcimer 0 98 106 Oud 0 0 107 Shamisen 0 113 108 GuZheng 0 0 108 Koto 0 0 109 Kalimba 0 0 110 Bagpipe 0 0 111 Fiddle 0 0 112 Shanai 126 0 128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc. DUAL* 0 112 1 Octave Piano 0 112 1 Piano + Strings 0 112 1 Piano Pad 0 0 6 E.P. Pad 0 0 49 Octave Strings 0 0 62 Octave Brass 0 0 49 Orchestra Tutti 0 0 53 Octave Choir 0 0 62 Jazz Section 0 0 74 Flute & Clarinet SOUND EFFECTS 0 0 121 Fret Noise 0 0 122 Breath Noise 0 0 123 Seashore 0 0 124 Bird Tweet 0 0 125 Telephone Ring 0 0 126 Helicopter 0 0 127 Applause 0 0 128 Gunshot DRUM KITS 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 127 0 9 Room Kit 127 0 17 Rock Kit 127 0 25 Electronic Kit 127 0 26 Analog Kit 127 0 113 Dance Kit 127 0 33 Jazz Kit 127 0 41 Brush Kit 127 0 49 Symphony Kit 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit * When you select a Voice of the DUAL category, two voices sound at the same time. The Voice whose MIDI program change number is indicated in the Voice List is known as the Main Voice. XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List Voice No. 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 *170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG PIANO 0 0 1 Grand Piano 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP 0 40 1 Piano Strings 0 41 1 Dream 0 0 2 Bright Piano 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP 0 32 3 Detuned CP80 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano 0 0 7 Harpsichord 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2 0 0 8 Clavi 0 1 8 Clavi KSP XG CHROMATIC 0 0 9 Celesta 0 0 10 Glockenspiel 0 0 11 Music Box 0 64 11 Orgel 0 0 12 Vibraphone 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP 0 0 13 Marimba 0 1 13 Marimba KSP 0 64 13 Sine Marimba 0 97 13 Balimba 0 98 13 Log Drums 0 0 14 Xylophone 0 0 15 Tubular Bells 0 96 15 Church Bells 0 97 15 Carillon 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2 0 96 16 Cimbalom 0 97 16 Santur XG ORGAN 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ 0 33 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 1 0 34 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 2 0 35 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 1 0 37 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 3 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 0 64 17 Organ Bass 0 65 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 2 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 0 24 18 70’s Percussive Organ 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ 0 33 18 Light Organ 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2 0 0 19 Rock Organ 0 64 19 Rotary Organ 0 65 19 Slow Rotary 0 66 19 Fast Rotary 0 0 20 Church Organ 0 32 20 Church Organ 3 0 35 20 Church Organ 2 0 40 20 Notre Dame 0 64 20 Organ Flute 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute 0 0 21 Reed Organ PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 59 Voice List Voice No. 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 *278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 60 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 40 21 Puff Organ 0 0 22 Accordion 0 0 23 Harmonica 0 32 23 Harmonica 2 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2 XG GUITAR 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 0 96 25 Ukulele 0 0 26 Steel Guitar 0 35 26 12-string Guitar 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 0 96 26 Mandolin 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar 0 32 27 Jazz Amp 0 0 28 Clean Guitar 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar 0 0 29 Muted Guitar 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar 0 45 29 Jazz Man 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2 XG BASS 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 0 45 33 0 0 34 Finger Bass 0 18 34 Finger Dark Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 0 40 34 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2 0 65 34 Modulated Bass 0 0 35 Pick Bass 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass 0 41 40 DX Bass XG STRINGS 0 0 41 Violin 0 8 41 Slow Violin 0 0 42 Viola 0 0 43 Cello 0 0 44 Contrabass 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings 0 40 45 Suspense Strings 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp 0 40 47 Yang Chin 0 0 48 Timpani PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG ENSEMBLE 0 0 49 Strings 1 0 3 49 Stereo Strings 0 8 49 Slow Strings 0 35 49 60’s Strings 0 40 49 Orchestra 0 41 49 Orchestra 2 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra 0 45 49 Velocity Strings 0 0 50 Strings 2 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings 0 8 50 Legato Strings 0 40 50 Warm Strings 0 41 50 Kingdom 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2 0 0 53 Choir Aahs 0 3 53 Stereo Choir 0 32 53 Mellow Choir 0 40 53 Choir Strings 0 0 54 Voice Oohs 0 0 55 Synth Voice 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2 0 41 55 Choral 0 64 55 Analog Voice 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2 0 64 56 Impact XG BRASS 0 0 57 Trumpet 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet 0 0 58 Trombone 0 18 58 Trombone 2 0 0 59 Tuba 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet 0 0 61 French Horn 0 6 61 French Horn Solo 0 32 61 French Horn 2 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra 0 0 62 Brass Section 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2 0 18 64 Soft Brass 0 41 64 Choir Brass XG REED 0 0 65 Soprano Sax 0 0 66 Alto Sax 0 40 66 Sax Section 0 0 67 Tenor Sax 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 0 68 Baritone Sax 0 0 69 Oboe 0 0 70 English Horn 0 0 71 Bassoon 0 0 72 Clarinet XG PIPE 0 0 73 Piccolo 0 0 74 Flute 0 0 75 Recorder 0 0 76 Pan Flute 0 0 77 Blown Bottle 0 0 78 Shakuhachi 0 0 79 Whistle 0 0 80 Ocarina XG SYNTH LEAD 0 0 81 Square Lead 0 6 81 Square Lead 2 0 8 81 LM Square 0 18 81 Hollow 0 19 81 Shroud 0 64 81 Mellow Voice List Voice No. 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 65 81 Solo Sine 0 66 81 Sine Lead 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth 0 20 82 Big Lead 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog 0 0 83 Calliope Lead 0 65 83 Pure Lead 0 0 84 Chiff Lead 0 0 85 Charang Lead 0 64 85 Distorted Lead 0 0 86 Voice Lead 0 0 87 Fifths Lead 0 35 87 Big Five 0 0 88 Bass & Lead 0 16 88 Big & Low 0 64 88 Fat & Perky 0 65 88 Soft Whirl XG SYNTH PAD 0 0 89 New Age Pad 0 64 89 Fantasy 0 0 90 Warm Pad 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad 0 0 92 Choir Pad 0 66 92 Itopia 0 0 93 Bowed Pad 0 0 94 Metallic Pad 0 0 95 Halo Pad 0 0 96 Sweep Pad XG SYNTH EFFECTS 0 0 97 Rain 0 65 97 African Wind 0 66 97 Carib 0 0 98 Sound Track 0 27 98 Prologue 0 0 99 Crystal 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp 0 14 99 Popcorn 0 18 99 Tiny Bells 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes 0 41 99 Clear Bells 0 42 99 Chorus Bells 0 65 99 Soft Crystal 0 70 99 Air Bells 0 71 99 Bell Harp 0 72 99 Gamelimba 0 0 100 Atmosphere 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere 0 19 100 Hollow Release 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano 0 64 100 Nylon Harp 0 65 100 Harp Vox 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad 0 0 101 Brightness 0 0 102 Goblins 0 64 102 Goblins Synth 0 65 102 Creeper 0 67 102 Ritual 0 68 102 To Heaven 0 70 102 Night 0 71 102 Glisten 0 96 102 Bell Choir 0 0 103 Echoes 0 0 104 Sci-Fi XG WORLD 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar 0 35 105 Sitar 2 0 97 105 Tamboura 0 0 106 Banjo Voice No. 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 28 106 Muted Banjo 0 96 106 Rabab 0 97 106 Gopichant 0 96 108 Taisho-kin 0 97 108 Kanoon XG PERCUSSIVE 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell 0 96 113 Bonang 0 97 113 Altair 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal 0 0 114 Agogo 0 0 115 Steel Drums 0 97 115 Glass Percussion 0 98 115 Thai Bells 0 0 116 Woodblock 0 96 116 Castanets 0 0 117 Taiko Drum 0 96 117 Gran Cassa 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2 0 65 118 Real Tom 0 66 118 Rock Tom 0 0 119 Synth Drum 0 64 119 Analog Tom 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal XG SOUND EFFECTS 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2 64 0 4 String Slap 64 0 17 Flute Key Click 64 0 33 Shower 64 0 34 Thunder 64 0 35 Wind 64 0 36 Stream 64 0 37 Bubble 64 0 38 Feed 64 0 49 Dog 64 0 50 Horse 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2 64 0 56 Maou 64 0 65 Phone Call 64 0 66 Door Squeak 64 0 67 Door Slam 64 0 68 Scratch Cut 64 0 69 Scratch Split 64 0 70 Wind Chime 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal 64 0 83 Car Passing 64 0 84 Car Crash 64 0 85 Siren 64 0 86 Train 64 0 87 Jet Plane 64 0 88 Starship 64 0 89 Burst 64 0 90 Roller Coaster 64 0 91 Submarine 64 0 97 Laugh 64 0 98 Scream 64 0 99 Punch 64 0 100 Heartbeat 64 0 101 Footsteps 64 0 113 Machine Gun 64 0 114 Laser Gun 64 0 115 Explosion 64 0 116 Firework The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 61 Drum Kit List •“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “141: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 62 A#5 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Off Group Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 141 127/000/001 142 127/000/002 143 127/000/009 144 127/000/017 145 127/000/025 146 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Snare H Soft 2 SD Rock H Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare L Hi Q 2 SD Rock H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H BD Rock BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog L BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 Open Rim Shot 2 Bass Drum 2 Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H Room Tom 1 SD Rock Rim Rock Tom 1 SD Rock H E Tom 1 Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Room Tom 4 Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 4 E Tom 5 Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Analog Cowbell Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Scratch Push Scratch Pull Drum Kit List C1 147 127/000/113 148 127/000/033 149 127/000/041 150 127/000/049 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit Alternate Group 122 126/000/128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc. 151 126/000/001 152 126/000/002 153 126/000/113 SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Sound Effect Kit C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 Reverse Cymbal F#1 G1 Hi Q 2 AnSD Snappy Drum Loop SD Jazz H Light Brush Slap L G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 F#2 G#2 A2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 Bass Drum L BD Jazz BD Jazz Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute SD Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Sn M SD Jazz M Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tap Brush Tom 1 Marching Sn H Jazz Tom 1 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 4 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Hand Cym. L Jazz Tom 6 Hand Cym.Short L Cutting Noise Cutting Noise 2 String Slap D#2 G2 B2 AnBD Dance-1 AnSD OpenRim AnBD Dance-2 AnBD Dance-3 Analog Side Stick AnSD Q AnSD Ana+Acoustic Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 3 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 4 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open 2 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 D#3 Flute Key Click F#3 G3 G#3 Analog Cowbell Hand Cym. H A3 B3 C4 A#3 Hand Cym.Short H C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L G#4 A#4 Analog Maracas 4 5 4 5 6 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 Analog Claves 6 F#5 Scratch Push Scratch Pull 7 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 Heartbeat Footsteps Door Squeak Door Slam Applause Camera Horn Hiccup Cuckoo Clock Stream Frog Rooster Dog Cat Owl Horse Gallop Horse Neigh Cow Lion Scratch Yo! Go! Get up! Whoow! Huuaah! A4 C5 Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine F#4 G4 B4 Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 7 Dagu Mute Zhongcha Mute Dagu Heavy Zhongcha Open Paigu Middle Paigu Low Xiaocha Mute Bangu Xiaocha Open Bangzi Muyu Low Zhongluo Mute Muyu Mid-Low Zhongluo Open Muyu Middle Xiaoluo Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Uh!+Hit Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Applause 1 Applause 2 Applause 3 Applause 4 Maou PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 63 Style List Style No. Style Name Style No. 8 BEAT Style No. Style Name 094 Learning4/4 001 8BeatModern 048 Soul 095 Learning6/8 002 60’sGtrPop 049 DetroitPop 096 Fun 3/4 003 8BeatAdria 050 6/8Soul 097 Fun 4/4 004 60’s8Beat 051 CrocoTwist 005 8Beat 052 Rock&Roll 098 Stride 006 OffBeat 053 ComboBoogie 099 PianoSwing 007 60’sRock 054 6/8Blues 100 PianoBoogie 008 HardRock COUNTRY 101 Arpeggio 009 RockShuffle 055 CountryPop 102 Habanera 010 8BeatRock 056 CountrySwing 103 SlowRock 16 BEAT 057 Country2/4 104 8BeatPianoBallad 011 16Beat 058 Bluegrass 105 6/8PianoMarch 012 PopShuffle LATIN 106 PianoWaltz 013 GuitarPop 059 BrazilianSamba 014 16BtUptempo 060 BossaNova 015 KoolShuffle 061 Forro 016 HipHopLight 062 Tijuana BALLAD 063 Mambo 017 PianoBallad 064 Salsa 018 LoveSong 065 Beguine 019 6/8ModernEP 066 Reggae 020 6/8SlowRock 021 OrganBallad 067 VienneseWaltz 022 PopBallad 068 EnglishWaltz 023 16BeatBallad 069 Slowfox DANCE 070 Foxtrot 024 EuroTrance 071 Quickstep 025 Ibiza 072 Tango 026 SwingHouse 073 Pasodoble 027 Clubdance 074 Samba 028 ClubLatin 075 ChaChaCha 029 Garage1 076 Rumba 030 Garage2 077 031 TechnoParty 032 UKPop 078 USMarch 033 HipHopGroove 079 6/8March 034 HipShuffle 080 GermanMarch 035 HipHopPop 081 PolkaPop DISCO 082 OberPolka 036 70’sDisco 083 Tarantella 037 LatinDisco 084 Showtune 038 SaturdayNight 085 ChristmasSwing DiscoHands 086 ChristmasWaltz SWING & JAZZ 087 ScottishReel SwingWaltz 039 64 Style Name R&B BALLROOM Jive TRAD & WORLD 040 BigBandFast 041 BigBandBallad 088 042 JazzClub 089 JazzWaltz 043 Swing1 090 CountryWaltz 044 Swing2 091 OberWalzer 045 Five/Four 092 Musette 046 Dixieland 047 Ragtime 093 Learning2/4 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual WALTZ CHILDREN PIANIST Music Database List MDB No. MDB Name MDB No. POP MDB Name SWING & JAZZ MDB No. MDB Name 92 CielPari GrndClok 1 AlvFever 47 ChooChoo 93 2 DayPdise 48 HighMoon 94 JinglBel 3 GoMyWay 49 InMood 95 MickMrch 4 HowDeep! 50 MistySax 96 Showbiz 5 HurryLuv 51 MoonLit 97 StarMrch 6 Imagine 52 New York 98 WashPost 7 JustCall 53 SaintMch 99 XmasWalz 8 SultanSw 54 ShearJz 100 YankDood 9 WhitePle 55 TstHoney 10 YesterPf 56 ROCK USPatrol EASY LISTENING 11 JumpRock 57 Close2U 12 PickUpPc 58 Entrtain 13 RdRiverR 59 LuvStory 14 SatsfyGt 60 MyPrince 15 Sheriff 61 PupetStr 16 SmokeWtr 62 Raindrop 17 TwistAgn 63 R'ticGtr 18 VenusPop 64 SingRain DANCE 65 SmallWld 19 2 of Us 66 SpkSoft 20 B Leave 67 StrangeN 21 Back St 68 TimeGoes 22 Crockett 69 WhteXmas 23 FunkyTwn 70 WishStar 24 KillSoft 71 WondrWld 25 Nine PM 26 SingBack 72 BambaLa 27 StrandD 73 BeHappy! BALLAD LATIN 74 CopaLola 75 DayNight Ipanema 28 AdelineB 29 CatMemry 76 30 ElvGhett 77 MuchoTrp 31 Feeling 78 Sunshine 32 Mn Rivr 79 Tico Org 33 OnMyMnd 80 TrbWave 34 OverRbow 35 ReleseMe 81 BoxerFlt 36 SavingLv 82 CntryRds 37 SmokyEye 83 Jambala 38 WhisprSx 84 TopWorld R&B 85 YlwRose COUNTRY BALLROOM 39 AmazingG 40 BoogiePf 86 BrazilBr 41 Clock Rk 87 CherryTp 42 CU later 88 DanubeWv 43 HappyDay 89 TangoAc 44 RisingSn 90 45 ShookUp 46 TeddyBer Tea4Two TRADITIONAL 91 CampRace PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 65 Song List Song No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 Song Name Top Picks Demo 1 (Yamaha Original) Demo 2 (Yamaha Original) Demo 3 (Yamaha Original) Learn to Play Für Elise (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven) Für Elise (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Basic) (Traditional) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Advanced) (Traditional) Turkish March (Basic) (W.A. Mozart) Turkish March (Advanced) (W.A. Mozart) Ode to Joy (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven) Ode to Joy (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven) The Entertainer (Basic) (S. Joplin) The Entertainer (Advanced) (S. Joplin) Londonderry Air (Basic) (Traditional) Londonderry Air (Advanced) (Traditional) The Last Rose of Summer (Basic) (Traditional) The Last Rose of Summer (Advanced) (Traditional) Amazing Grace (Basic) (Traditional) Amazing Grace (Advanced) (Traditional) Favorite Frère Jacques (Traditional) Der Froschgesang (Traditional) Aura Lee (Traditional) London Bridge (Traditional) Sur le pont d'Avignon (Traditional) Nedelka (Traditional) Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani) Sippin’ Cider Through a Straw (Traditional) Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster) Bury Me Not on the Lone Prairie (Traditional) Cielito Lindo (Traditional) Santa Lucia (A. Longo) If You’re Happy and You Know It (Traditional) Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster) Greensleeves (Traditional) Kalinka (Traditional) Holdilia Cook (Traditional) Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster) La Cucaracha (Traditional) Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza) Largo (from the New World) (A. Dvořák) Brahms’ Lullaby (J. Brahms) Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt) Pomp and Circumstance (E. Elgar) Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet) Jupiter, the Bringer of Jollity (G. Holst) The Polovetsian Dances (A. Borodin) Die Moldau (B. Smetana) Salut d'Amour op.12 (E. Elgar) Humoresques (A. Dvořák) Symphony No.9 (from the New World - 4th movement) (A. Dvořák) Song No. 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 Song Name Favorite with Style O du lieber Augustin (Traditional) Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional) When Irish Eyes Are Smiling (E. R. Ball) Little Brown Jug (Traditional) Ten Little Indians (Traditional) On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional) My Darling Clementine (Traditional) Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster) Red River Valley (Traditional) Turkey in the Straw (Traditional) Muffin Man (R. A. King) Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional) Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work) Camptown Races (S. C. Foster) When the Saints Go Marching In (Traditional) Yankee Doodle (Traditional) Battle Hymn of the Republic (Traditional) I’ve Been Working on the Railroad (Traditional) American Patrol (F. W. Meacham) Down by the Riverside (Traditional) Instrument Master Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré) Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi) Serenade for Strings in C major, op.48 (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II) Romance de Amor (Traditional) Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach) Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart) Radetzky Marsch (J. Strauss I) Piano Repertoire Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional) Die Lorelei (F. Silcher) Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop) Scarborough Fair (Traditional) My Old Kentucky Home (Traditional) Loch Lomond (Traditional) Silent Night (F. Gruber) Deck the Halls (Traditional) O Christmas Tree (Traditional) Sonata Pathétique 2nd Adagio Cantabile (L. v. Beethoven) Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod (J. S. Bach / C. F. Gounod) Jesus bleibet meine Freude (J. S. Bach) Prelude op.28-15 “Raindrop” (F. Chopin) Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin) Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” (F. Chopin) Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart) Arabesque (J. F. Burgmüller) La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller) Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven) Turkish March (W.A. Mozart) 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin) Annie Laurie (Traditional) Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (S. C. Foster) • Some songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. • A song book (free downloadable scores) is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ 66 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Effect Type List Harmony Types No. 01 Harmony Type Duet 02 Trio 03 Block Description If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played. 04 Country 05 Octave 06 Trill 1/4 note 07 Trill 1/6 note 08 Trill 1/8 note 09 Trill 1/12 note 10 Trill 1/16 note 11 Trill 1/24 note 12 Trill 1/32 note 13 Tremolo 1/4 note 14 Tremolo 1/6 note 15 Tremolo 1/8 note 16 Tremolo 1/12 note 17 Tremolo 1/16 note 18 Tremolo 1/24 note 19 Tremolo 1/32 note 20 Echo 1/4 note 21 Echo 1/6 note 22 Echo 1/8 note 23 Echo 1/12 note 24 Echo 1/16 note 25 Echo 1/24 note 26 Echo 1/32 note If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously. If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously. (The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.) If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played. (The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.) Reverb Types No. 01–03 Reverb Type Description Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb. 04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb. 06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. 08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Off No effect. 10 Chorus Types No. Chorus Type Description 01–02 Chorus 1–2 03–04 Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound. Off No effect. 05 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 67 Specifications Size/Weight Keyboard Display Panel Voices Dimensions Weight Number of Keys Touch Response Type Backlit Language Language Tone Generation Polyphony Preset Compatibility Types Effects Function Preset Accompaniment Styles Tone Generating Technology Number of Polyphony (Max.) Number of Voices Reverb Chorus Ultra-Wide Stereo Harmony Dual Split Panel Sustain Number of Preset Styles Fingering Style Control Custom Other Features Preset Songs WxDxH Recording Compatible Data Format User Styles Music Database One Touch Setting (OTS) Number of Preset Songs Number of Songs Number of Tracks Data Capacity Recording Function Playback Recording Lesson Functions Storage and Connectivity Amplifiers and Speakers Overall Controls Miscellaneous Internal Memory Connectivity Amplifiers Speakers Metronome Tempo Range Transpose Tuning Portable Grand Button Power Supply Power Supply Power Consumption Auto Power Off Function Included Accessories 945 x 369 x 132 mm (37-3/16” x 14-1/2” x 5-3/16”) 4.9kg (10 Ibs. 13 oz.) (not including batteries) 61  Yes LCD display Yes English English AWM Stereo Sampling 32  140 panel voices + 13 drum/SFX kits + 344 XGlite voices GM/XGlite 9 types 4 types 3 types 26 types Yes Yes Yes 106  Multi fingering ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL Yes 100  Yes 102  5  2  Approx. 10,000 notes (when only “melody” tracks are recorded) Approx. 5,500 chords (when only “chord” tracks are recorded) Yes SMF  Original File Format [1 LISTENING, 2 TIMING, 3 WAITING], [KEYS TO SUCCESS], [PHRASE REPEAT], [CHORD DICTIONARY], [A-B REPEAT] Yes 11 – 280 -12 – 0 – +12 427.0 - 440.0 - 453.0 Hz Yes 1.7MB  PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN, USB TO HOST, SUSTAIN 2.5W + 2.5W 12cm x 2 • Adaptor: Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent • Batteries:Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries 7W (When using PA-130 power adaptor) Yes • Music Rest • Owner’s Manual • My Yamaha Product User Registration • AC Power adaptor* (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. Optional Accessories • Adaptor: Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent • Footswitch: FC4/FC5 • Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L • Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 68 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Index A H A-B Repeat ..................................................................34 ACMP ON/OFF ..........................................................19 Auto Accompaniment ................................................19 Auto accompaniment range .......................................19 Auto Power Off .......................................................9, 43 Harmony ..................................................................... 16 Harmony Type List .................................................... 67 Harmony Volume ....................................................... 42 Headphones .................................................................. 9 B Backup ................................................................... 40, 45 Backup File .................................................................45 Battery ........................................................................... 8 Beat Display ................................................................ 13 BGM Playback ...........................................................26 C Chord ...........................................................................21 Chord Dictionary ........................................................22 Chord Display .............................................................13 Chorus ................................................................... 17, 42 Chorus Send Level (Main, Dual and Split) ..............42 Chorus Type List ........................................................67 Computer .....................................................................44 I Initial Send .................................................................. 43 Initialization ................................................................ 40 Intro ............................................................................. 20 K KEYS TO SUCCESS ................................................ 28 L Left .............................................................................. 32 Lesson ......................................................................... 28 Lesson Track R/L for transferred songs ............. 43, 46 Listening ..................................................................... 31 Local ............................................................................ 42 M D DC IN ............................................................................8 Delete (File) ................................................................ 40 Delete (User Song) ..................................................... 39 Demo ...........................................................................26 Display ........................................................................13 Drum Kit .....................................................................14 Drum Kit List .............................................................. 62 Dual .............................................................................17 E Effect Type List ..........................................................67 Ending ......................................................................... 20 External Clock ............................................................42 F FF .................................................................................27 Footswitch (Sustain jack) ............................................9 Function .......................................................................41 Function Setting List ............................................41–43 G Grade ...........................................................................32 Main/Auto fill ............................................................. 20 Master EQ ..................................................................... 9 Master EQ Type ......................................................... 42 Master Volume Control ............................................... 9 Measure ....................................................................... 13 Melody Voice .............................................................. 27 Metronome .................................................................. 35 Metronome Volume ................................................... 43 MIDI ............................................................................ 42 Music Database .......................................................... 24 Music Rest .................................................................... 6 Musicsoft Downloader ............................................... 45 Mute ............................................................................ 34 N Notation ...................................................................... 13 O Octave (Main/Dual/Split) .......................................... 42 One Touch Setting (OTS) .......................................... 14 Option .......................................................................... 68 P part ............................................................................... 32 Passing Status ....................................................... 13, 30 Pause ........................................................................... 27 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 69 Index PC setting ....................................................................43 PHONES/OUTPUT .....................................................9 Phrase ..........................................................................33 Phrase Repeat .............................................................. 33 PORTABLE GRAND ................................................15 Power Adaptor ..............................................................8 Press and Hold for a while .........................................11 Tuning ......................................................................... 41 R V Recording ..............................................................36–38 Reverb ....................................................................17, 42 Reverb Level ...............................................................42 Reverb Type List .........................................................67 Rew ..............................................................................27 Rhythm ..................................................................12, 18 Right ............................................................................32 rit.(ritardando) .............................................................20 Root .......................................................................21–22 Voice ...................................................................... 12, 14 Voice List .................................................................... 58 Volume (Main Voice/Dual Voice/Split Voice) ......... 42 Volume (Song) ............................................................ 41 Volume (Style) ............................................................ 41 Ultra-Wide Stereo ...................................................... 15 USB ....................................................................... 10, 44 User Song .................................................................... 36 W Waiting ........................................................................ 31 X S Save data to computer ................................................45 Section ......................................................................... 20 SMF Format ................................................................ 45 Song .......................................................................12, 25 Song Book ...............................................................6, 48 Song List .....................................................................66 Song Volume ...............................................................41 Split ..............................................................................17 Split Point ..............................................................19, 41 START/STOP .............................................................12 Step ..............................................................................28 Style .......................................................................12, 18 Style File .....................................................................46 Style List .....................................................................64 Style Volume ...............................................................41 Supplied Accessories .............................................6, 68 Sustain (Footswitch) .....................................................9 Sustain (Panel) ......................................................17, 42 Synchro Start .............................................................. 19 T Tempo ..........................................................................35 TEMPO/TAP .............................................................. 35 Time Signature ......................................................35, 43 Timing ......................................................................... 31 Touch Response ..........................................................15 Touch sensitivity .........................................................41 Track ................................................................13, 34, 37 Track Rec ..............................................................37–38 Transfer .......................................................................45 Transpose ....................................................................41 70 U PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual XGlite ............................................................................ 6 Memo PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 71 Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples): This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved. (weee_battery_eu_en) OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. (battery) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard Model Name : PSR-E333/YPT-330 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. 72 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 73 74 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para obter detalhes de produtos, entre em contato com o representante mais próximo da Yamaha ou com o distribuidor autorizado relacionado a seguir. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Подробные сведения об инструменте можно получить у местного представителя корпорации Yamaha или уполномоченного дистрибьютора, указанного в следующем списке. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 ITALY CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA SPAIN/PORTUGAL MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 ASIA Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 EUROPE Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-500-2925 Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. 5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-466-5551 INDONESIA GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 021-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3467-3300 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 03-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: 495 626 5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 6747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2622 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Digital Musical Instruments Division EKB54 Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 Yamaha Global Home http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division © 2011 Yamaha Corporation 012POTY*.*-01A0 Printed in China WW13050
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76

Yamaha YPT-330 de handleiding

Categorie
MIDI-toetsenborden
Type
de handleiding
Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

Andere documenten